Metrosoft QUARTIS User Manual PDF

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7
User Manual
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 User Manual
© 2012 WENZEL Metromec AG
All rights, including those of reprinting, replication of parts of this manual and its translation are reserved by
WENZEL Metromec AG.
No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or copied with the aid of electronic replication systems
without the written approval of WENZEL Metromec AG.
Subject to technical revisions during the course of further development.
June 2012
WENZEL Metromec AG
Rheinfelsstrasse 1
7007 Chur
Switzerland
Tel. +41 81 257 07 00

Fax +41 81 257 07 01
http://www.metromec.ch
metromec@metromec.ch
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 2
Table of Contents
Table of Contents
Table of Contents ............................................................................................3
1 Fluent User Interface ...........................................................................15

1.1 Live preview .................................................................................................. 16
2 Metrosoft button...................................................................................17
2.1 New .............................................................................................................. 19
2.1.1 Create new measurement database ....................................................... 19
2.1.2 Create new work piece ........................................................................... 20
2.1.3 Create new measurement ...................................................................... 21
2.1.4 Create new program............................................................................... 22
2.1.5 Create new report, new template or new report paper ............................ 24
2.1.6 Create new quick selection table ............................................................ 26
2.2 Open ............................................................................................................. 27
2.2.1 Open measurement database ................................................................ 27
2.2.2 Open work piece .................................................................................... 28
2.2.3 Open measurement................................................................................ 29
2.2.4 Open program ........................................................................................ 30
2.2.5 Open report, template or report paper .................................................... 31
2.2.6 Open quick selection table ..................................................................... 31
2.3 Save ............................................................................................................. 32
2.3.1 Save CAD model under a new name...................................................... 32
2.3.2 Save active program .............................................................................. 33
2.3.3 Save report, template or report paper ..................................................... 34
2.4 Print .............................................................................................................. 35
2.4.1 Print report, template or report paper...................................................... 35
2.5 Import ........................................................................................................... 36
2.5.1 Import (convert) CAD models ................................................................. 36
Converter options for CAD files 38
2.5.2 Import or link programs........................................................................... 40
2.5.3 Import elements or points from VDA file ................................................. 42
2.6 Export ........................................................................................................... 43
2.6.1 Export programs..................................................................................... 43
2.6.2 Export difference of coordinate systems ................................................. 45
2.6.3 Export features in Q-DAS format ............................................................ 46
Q-DAS field configuration 48
2.6.4 Export elements into CAD file ................................................................. 49
2.7 Work window ................................................................................................ 53
2.7.1 Display and edit database ...................................................................... 53
2.7.2 Display, edit and execute programs........................................................ 54
2.7.3 Display and edit report ........................................................................... 54
2.7.4 Show quick access for program start ...................................................... 55
2.7.5 Display Feature Data .............................................................................. 56
2.7.6 Statistical evaluation of features ............................................................. 56
2.8 Extras ........................................................................................................... 57
2.8.1 Configure external programs .................................................................. 57
2.9 QUARTIS Options ........................................................................................ 59
2.9.1 Change personal settings ....................................................................... 59
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Table of Contents 3

Table of Contents
2.9.2 Adjust the quick access toolbar .............................................................. 60

2.9.3 Adjust machine settings.......................................................................... 62
2.9.4 Adjust measurement settings ................................................................. 63
2.9.5 Adjust evaluation settings ....................................................................... 64
2.9.6 Adjust graphics settings.......................................................................... 65
2.9.7 Adjust database settings ........................................................................ 66
2.9.8 Adjust statistics settings ......................................................................... 67
2.9.9 Adjust report settings.............................................................................. 68
2.9.10 Adjust system settings............................................................................ 70
2.9.11 Display general information about Metrosoft QUARTIS .......................... 71
3 Quick Access Toolbar .........................................................................73
4 Ribbon ...................................................................................................74
4.1 Groups .......................................................................................................... 74
4.2 Contextual tabs ............................................................................................. 75
5 Element window ...................................................................................76

5.1 Display previous element .............................................................................. 77
5.2 Display next element .................................................................................... 77
5.3 Load element in element window (via list) .................................................... 77
5.4 Load element in element window (via mouse tool) ....................................... 78
5.5 Exchange contents of element window......................................................... 78
5.6 Lock element in right element window .......................................................... 79
5.7 Edit element .................................................................................................. 79
6 Workspace ............................................................................................80
6.1 Customize workspace ................................................................................... 80
7 Status window ......................................................................................82

7.1 Machine mode display .................................................................................. 82
7.2 Display of currently loaded work piece ......................................................... 82
7.3 Display of currently loaded measurement ..................................................... 82
7.4 Program information ..................................................................................... 83
7.5 Display of currently loaded reference sphere................................................ 83
7.6 Display of current probe head position ......................................................... 84
7.7 Display of currently loaded probe system ..................................................... 84
7.8 Display of currently loaded stylus and probe mode ...................................... 84
7.9 Display of current coordinate system ............................................................ 84
7.10 Average machine/work piece temperature display ....................................... 85
7.11 Virtual joystick, click probe point on CAD model and simulation speed ........ 85
7.12 Current coordinates display .......................................................................... 86
7.13 Display of active measurement units ............................................................ 87
8 Database ...............................................................................................88
8.1 Information about the database .................................................................... 88
8.2 Create new measurement database ............................................................. 88
8.3 Open measurement database ...................................................................... 89

Table of Contents
8.4 Display and edit database............................................................................. 89

8.5 Adjust database settings............................................................................... 90
8.6 Create user defined properties ..................................................................... 91
8.7 Edit database ................................................................................................ 93
8.7.1 Copy data ............................................................................................... 93
8.7.2 Paste data .............................................................................................. 93
8.7.3 Delete data ............................................................................................. 95
8.7.4 Edit data ................................................................................................. 95
8.8 Customize View ............................................................................................ 96
8.8.1 Print data ................................................................................................ 96
8.8.2 Split database view ................................................................................ 97
8.8.3 Close database window.......................................................................... 97
8.9 Display data details....................................................................................... 98
9 CAD Model ............................................................................................99

9.1 Information about the CAD model ................................................................. 99
9.2 Import (convert) CAD models ..................................................................... 100
9.3 Save CAD model under a new name .......................................................... 102
9.4 Change CAD model .................................................................................... 103
9.5 Delete CAD model ...................................................................................... 104
9.6 Converter options for CAD files .................................................................. 105
9.7 Converter .................................................................................................... 108
9.7.1 ACIS Converter .................................................................................... 108
9.7.2 CATIA V4 Converter............................................................................. 108
9.7.3 CATIA V5 Converter............................................................................. 109
9.7.4 DXF Converter ..................................................................................... 110
9.7.5 IGES Converter .................................................................................... 111
9.7.6 INS Converter ...................................................................................... 112
9.7.7 Parasolid Converter.............................................................................. 113
9.7.8 ProEngineer Converter ......................................................................... 114
9.7.9 Siemens NX Converter ......................................................................... 115
9.7.10 Solid Edge Converter ........................................................................... 116
9.7.11 SolidWorks Converter .......................................................................... 117
9.7.12 STEP Converter ................................................................................... 118
9.7.13 VDA Converter ..................................................................................... 119
9.7.14 User format Converter .......................................................................... 120
10 Program...............................................................................................123
10.1 Information about the program.................................................................... 123
10.2 Create new program ................................................................................... 123
10.3 Mirror program ............................................................................................ 125
10.4 Open program............................................................................................. 127
10.5 Save active program ................................................................................... 128
10.6 Import or link programs ............................................................................... 129
10.7 Export programs ......................................................................................... 131
10.8 Display, edit and execute programs ............................................................ 132
10.9 Execute program ........................................................................................ 133
10.9.1 Check program..................................................................................... 133
10.9.2 Execute program in new measurement ................................................ 134
10.9.3 Execute program with parameter modification ...................................... 134

Table of Contents
10.9.4 Execute program in current measurement............................................ 135

10.9.5 Execute program in single step mode................................................... 136
10.9.6 Pause program..................................................................................... 136
10.9.7 Stop program ....................................................................................... 137
10.9.8 Record program ................................................................................... 137
Delete backwards 138
Set insertion point 139
10.9.9 Edit program......................................................................................... 140
Activate edit mode 141
Deactivate/activate program sentences 142
10.9.10 Execute selection ................................................................................. 143
10.9.11 Execute from cursor ............................................................................. 144
10.9.12 Execute to cursor ................................................................................. 145
10.9.13 Set execution position .......................................................................... 146
10.10 Use program functions ............................................................... 146
10.10.1 CNC mode on/off.................................................................................. 146
10.10.2 Insert intermediate point ....................................................................... 147
10.10.3 Insert dialog.......................................................................................... 148
10.10.4 Insert image, sound or video ................................................................ 149
10.10.5 Insert comment .................................................................................... 150
10.10.6 Insert marker ........................................................................................ 151
10.10.7 Call subprogram ................................................................................... 152
10.10.8 Insert program loop .............................................................................. 153
10.10.9 Increase current measurement number by one .................................... 154
10.11 Change and print view ............................................................... 154
10.11.1 Activate/deactivate split program view .................................................. 154
10.11.2 Print program ....................................................................................... 155
10.11.3 Close program window ......................................................................... 155
10.12 Display program sentence details .............................................. 156
10.13 Set/delete breakpoint ................................................................. 156
11 Machine ...............................................................................................158
11.1 Information about the machine ................................................................... 158
11.2 Adjust machine settings .............................................................................. 158
11.2.1 Change measuring-/search-/retraction distance ................................... 158
11.2.2 Change positioning speed and acceleration ......................................... 160
11.2.3 Change measuring speed and acceleration.......................................... 161
11.2.4 Change articulating probing system settings ........................................ 162
11.2.5 Change scanning speed ....................................................................... 164
11.3 Change joystick direction ............................................................................ 165
11.4 Move machine to origin............................................................................... 166
11.5 Activate/deactivate axis drives .................................................................... 167
11.6 Position machine ........................................................................................ 169
11.7 Adjust temperature compensation settings ................................................. 170
11.7.1 Temperature compensation .................................................................. 170
12 Probe system ......................................................................................174

12.1 Information about the probe system ........................................................... 174
12.2 Adjust probe system settings ...................................................................... 174
12.3 Switch probing mode .................................................................................. 176
12.4 Calibrate probe system ............................................................................... 176

Table of Contents
12.4.1 Calibrate probe system manually or semi-automatically ....................... 176

12.4.2 Calibrate probe system automatically ................................................... 179
12.4.3 Calibrate probe system for PHS1 ......................................................... 180
12.5 Set up probe system ................................................................................... 181
12.6 Load probe system ..................................................................................... 185
12.7 Save probe system ..................................................................................... 186
12.8 Adjust probe system ................................................................................... 187
12.9 Optimize probe system ............................................................................... 188
12.10 Determine volumetric probing deviation...................................................... 190
12.11 Define stylus form ....................................................................................... 191
12.12 Enter stylus offset ....................................................................................... 192
13 Reference sphere ...............................................................................194

13.1 Information about the reference sphere ...................................................... 194
13.2 Adjust reference sphere settings ................................................................ 194
13.3 Load reference sphere................................................................................ 195
13.4 Calibrate reference sphere ......................................................................... 196
14 Articulating probing system .............................................................198

14.1 Information about the articulating probing system ...................................... 198
14.2 Change articulating probing system settings .............................................. 198
14.3 Swivel and rotate articulating probing system ............................................. 199
14.4 Calibrate articulating probing system PH10 ................................................ 200
14.5 Calibrate articulating probing system PHS1................................................ 203
15 Stylus changing system ....................................................................206

15.1 Information about stylus changing system .................................................. 206
15.2 Deposit probe and retrieve from a slot ........................................................ 206
15.3 Define a probe system component (slot content)........................................ 207
15.4 Calibrate stylus changing system ............................................................... 209
16 Measure ...............................................................................................213
16.1 Information about measuring ...................................................................... 213
16.2 Adjust measuring settings ........................................................................... 214
16.3 Measure element ........................................................................................ 216
16.3.1 Actions ................................................................................................. 218
16.3.2 Contextual Tab Geometry .................................................................... 219
Define/edit nominal values 219
Element description...............................................................................221
Select/edit reference 223
Select calculation method 224
Calculation methods ..............................................................................225
Standard ...............................................................................................226
X-, Y-, X-axis.........................................................................................226
Move to nominal point ...........................................................................227
Least squares (Gauss) ..........................................................................228
Chebychev ............................................................................................229
Minimum circumscribed .........................................................................230
Maximum inscribed ...............................................................................231
Tangential outside .................................................................................231

Table of Contents
Tangential inside ...................................................................................232

Perpendicular ........................................................................................232
2D .........................................................................................................232
Eliminate outliers 233
Filter elements 234
16.3.3 Contextual Tab Distribution .................................................................. 236
Define/edit distribution method and parameter 236
Triggered probe mode ...........................................................................237
Scanning probe mode ...........................................................................241
Pecking probe mode .............................................................................244
Centering probe mode...........................................................................245
Define limitation 246
Limitation for a plane .............................................................................246
Limitation for a curve .............................................................................246
Thin out points 247
Define/edit safety plane 248
16.3.4 Contextual Tab Edit .............................................................................. 249
16.3.5 Contextual Tab Features ...................................................................... 250
16.3.6 Contextual Tab Repeat......................................................................... 251
16.3.7 Contextual Tab Progress ...................................................................... 253
Edit measuring sequence 253
View measurement progress 253
Increase/decrease number of points 253
16.3.8 Contextual Tab Head orientation .......................................................... 254
Critical angles 255
Fixed angles 256
Focal point 256
17 Construct ............................................................................................257
17.1 Information about constructing elements .................................................... 257
17.2 Create element with input ........................................................................... 257
17.3 Create element out of existing elements ..................................................... 258
17.3.1 Create intersection element out of two elements .................................. 258
17.3.2 Create symmetry element out of two elements ..................................... 259
17.3.3 Create connection element out of two elements ................................... 260
17.3.4 Create a construction element of several elements .............................. 261
17.3.5 Create top of cone ................................................................................ 264
17.3.6 Create extract element out of curve ...................................................... 264
17.3.7 Create min/max element ...................................................................... 266
17.3.8 Create offset point ................................................................................ 268
17.3.9 Create offset line .................................................................................. 269
17.3.10 Create offset plane ............................................................................... 271
17.3.11 Create parallel element ........................................................................ 273
Construction of a parallel line 273
Construction of a parallel plane 274
17.3.12 Create perpendicular element .............................................................. 275
17.3.13 Create projection element .................................................................... 275
17.3.14 Create tangent element ........................................................................ 276
17.3.15 Construction Tables ............................................................................. 279
Intersection 279
Symmetry 281
Connection 283
Min/Max Element 284
Offset Line 286
Parallel 287
Perpendicular 288

Table of Contents
8. Projection 289
18 Align/Coordinate system ...................................................................290

18.1 Information about the coordinate system .................................................... 290
18.2 Switch between PCS/PLCS ........................................................................ 290
18.2.1 Activate PCS ........................................................................................ 290
18.2.2 Activate PLCS ...................................................................................... 290
18.3 Load coordinate system.............................................................................. 291
18.4 Save coordinate system ............................................................................. 292
18.5 Delete coordinate system ........................................................................... 293
18.6 Create coordinate system (primary, secondary direction and origin) .......... 294
18.6.1 Define primary direction........................................................................ 294
18.6.2 Define secondary direction ................................................................... 295
18.6.3 Define origin ......................................................................................... 296
18.7 Define coordinate system using reference point systems (RPS) ................ 297
18.8 Define coordinate system using Bestfit ....................................................... 298
18.9 Relocate coordinate system........................................................................ 300
18.10 Rotate coordinate system ........................................................................... 301
18.11 Transform coordinate system into CAD model coordinate system ............. 302
18.12 Export difference of coordinate systems ..................................................... 302
19 Features ..............................................................................................305
19.1 Information about the evaluation................................................................. 305
19.2 Static and dynamic features........................................................................ 305
19.3 Reference system according to ASME ....................................................... 307
19.4 Edit defaults ................................................................................................ 326
19.4.1 Edit default fix tolerances ..................................................................... 326
19.4.2 Edit general ISO and DIN tolerances .................................................... 328
Adjust ISO 2768 tolerances 328
Adjust DIN 16901 tolerances 333
Adjust DIN 1688 tolerances 334
19.4.3 Load company specific tolerances........................................................ 335
19.4.4 Select default tolerances ...................................................................... 340
19.4.5 Select Cartesian/polar output for evaluation ......................................... 340
19.5 Evaluate standard features ......................................................................... 341
19.5.1 Evaluate form deviation of an element.................................................. 341
19.5.2 Evaluate size of an element ................................................................. 342
19.5.3 Evaluate half size of an element ........................................................... 343
19.5.4 Evaluate position of an element............................................................ 344
19.5.5 Evaluate distance between elements ................................................... 345
Reduction for distance feature 346
19.5.6 Evaluate projection angle between elements........................................ 348
19.5.7 Evaluate 3D angle between elements .................................................. 349
19.5.8 Evaluate turning point of an element .................................................... 350
19.5.9 Evaluate position deviation dAB of an element ..................................... 351
19.5.10 Enter user specific feature .................................................................... 353
Calculate user specific feature 354
19.6 Evaluate form features................................................................................ 358
19.6.1 Evaluate straightness tolerance............................................................ 358
19.6.2 Evaluate flatness tolerance .................................................................. 359
19.6.3 Evaluate roundness tolerance .............................................................. 360

Table of Contents
19.6.4 Evaluate cylindricity tolerance .............................................................. 361

19.6.5 Evaluate profile tolerance of any line .................................................... 362
19.6.6 Evaluate profile tolerance of any surface .............................................. 364
19.6.7 Select tolerance zone ........................................................................... 365
19.7 Evaluate position features........................................................................... 367
19.7.1 Evaluate position tolerance .................................................................. 367
19.7.2 Evaluate concentricity and coaxiality tolerance ..................................... 370
Evaluation of a concentricity tolerance 371
Evaluation of a coaxiality tolerance 372
19.7.3 Evaluate symmetry tolerance ............................................................... 374
19.7.4 Evaluate angularity tolerance ............................................................... 375
19.7.5 Evaluate parallelism tolerance .............................................................. 377
19.7.6 Evaluate perpendicularity tolerance ...................................................... 379
19.7.7 Evaluate circular and planar run-out tolerance ..................................... 382
19.7.8 Evaluate total circular and planar run-out tolerance .............................. 383
20 Report ..................................................................................................384
20.1 Information about the report........................................................................ 384
20.2 Create new report ....................................................................................... 384
20.3 Create new report template ........................................................................ 386
20.4 Create new report paper ............................................................................. 387
20.5 Open report, template or report paper ........................................................ 388
20.6 Save report, template or report paper ......................................................... 388
20.7 Print report, template or report paper.......................................................... 390
20.8 Display and edit report ................................................................................ 390
20.9 Close report work window ........................................................................... 391
20.10 Change default settings .............................................................................. 391
20.10.1 Adjust report settings............................................................................ 391
20.10.2 Filter features for report ........................................................................ 393
20.10.3 Create table and data label layout ........................................................ 394
Create table layout 394
Create layout for point label 396
Create layout for element label 398
Create layout for feature label 400
20.11 Insert report objects .................................................................................... 402
20.11.1 Insert graphics view.............................................................................. 402
20.11.2 Insert table ........................................................................................... 404
20.12 Insert drawing objects ................................................................................. 407
20.12.1 Insert new page .................................................................................... 407
20.12.2 Delete selected pages .......................................................................... 407
20.12.3 Insert text field ...................................................................................... 408
20.12.4 Insert line/arrow.................................................................................... 409
20.12.5 Insert rectangle .................................................................................... 410
20.12.6 Insert ellipse/circle ................................................................................ 411
20.12.7 Insert image ......................................................................................... 411
20.13 Customize report view in work window ....................................................... 412
20.14 Customize objects ...................................................................................... 413
20.14.1 Edit....................................................................................................... 413
20.14.2 Align objects ......................................................................................... 413
20.14.3 Adjust format ........................................................................................ 414
20.14.4 Adjust margins ..................................................................................... 414
20.14.5 Adjust paper format .............................................................................. 415

Table of Contents
20.14.6 Adjust paper ......................................................................................... 415

20.14.7 Set anchor ............................................................................................ 415
20.14.8 Adjust table contents, graphics contents, table and data label layout ... 416
20.14.9 Align data labels ................................................................................... 417
20.14.10 Edit text field......................................................................................... 417
20.14.11 Adjust color and line settings ................................................................ 418
20.14.12 Adjust corners ...................................................................................... 419
20.14.13 Adjust arrows ....................................................................................... 419
20.14.14 Adjust image ........................................................................................ 420
20.15 Customize effects ....................................................................................... 420
20.15.1 Adjust frame ......................................................................................... 420
20.15.2 Adjust shadow ...................................................................................... 421
21 Graphics ..............................................................................................422
21.1 Information about the graphics ................................................................... 422
21.2 Change graphics display............................................................................. 422
21.2.1 Change graphics settings ..................................................................... 422
21.2.2 Display element graphics ..................................................................... 426
21.2.3 Adjust model representation ................................................................. 427
21.2.4 Adjust element representation .............................................................. 428
21.2.5 Display probe points ............................................................................. 428
21.2.6 Display probe point numbers ................................................................ 429
21.2.7 Display network grid ............................................................................. 429
21.2.8 Display element label ........................................................................... 430
21.2.9 Display feature label ............................................................................. 430
21.2.10 Colorize element in left element window with color spectrum ............... 431
21.2.11 Display machine components............................................................... 431
21.2.12 Show display options............................................................................ 432
21.2.13 Position work piece .............................................................................. 433
21.2.14 Manage CAD model layer .................................................................... 435
21.2.15 Display probe swivel range................................................................... 436
21.2.16 Connect probe points ........................................................................... 436
21.2.17 Display deviation of probe points (residues) ......................................... 437
21.2.18 Display position deviations of elements ................................................ 437
21.2.19 Display tolerance zone ......................................................................... 438
21.2.20 Show mouse pointer coordinates ......................................................... 439
21.2.21 Display coordinate axes ....................................................................... 440
21.2.22 Display color spectrum ......................................................................... 440
21.2.23 Display recorded motion paths ............................................................. 441
21.2.24 Record motion paths ............................................................................ 441
21.2.25 Delete recorded motion paths............................................................... 442
21.3 Change graphics view ................................................................................ 442
21.3.1 Zoom all ............................................................................................... 442
21.3.2 Enlarge window area ............................................................................ 443
21.3.3 Zoom out .............................................................................................. 444
21.3.4 Zoom in ................................................................................................ 444
21.3.5 Display CAD model and elements ........................................................ 445
21.3.6 Rotate, move and zoom view ............................................................... 445
21.3.7 Move view ............................................................................................ 446
21.3.8 Back to the last view............................................................................. 446
21.3.9 Continue to next view ........................................................................... 447
21.3.10 Display view perpendicular to element ................................................. 447
21.3.11 Split graphics view................................................................................ 448

Table of Contents
21.3.12 Define rotation angle ............................................................................ 449

21.3.13 Rotate view around horizontal screen axis ........................................... 449
21.3.14 Rotate view around vertical screen axis ............................................... 450
21.3.15 Rotate view around screen normal ....................................................... 450
21.3.16 Load standard views ............................................................................ 451
21.3.17 Create user view .................................................................................. 452
21.3.18 Delete user view................................................................................... 452
21.3.19 Rename user view................................................................................ 452
21.3.20 Load user view ..................................................................................... 453
21.3.21 Save user view ..................................................................................... 453
21.4 Create and manage intersections ............................................................... 454
21.4.1 Create and load intersections ............................................................... 454
21.4.2 Manage intersections ........................................................................... 455
21.5 Select elements .......................................................................................... 456
21.5.1 Select elements.................................................................................... 456
21.5.2 Cancel selection ................................................................................... 456
21.5.3 Fade selected elements out ................................................................. 457
21.5.4 Show all elements ................................................................................ 458
21.5.5 Invert selection ..................................................................................... 458
21.6 Insert auxiliary elements ............................................................................. 459
21.6.1 Insert curve .......................................................................................... 459
21.7 Mirror CAD model ....................................................................................... 460
21.8 Edit graphics ............................................................................................... 461
21.8.1 Select elements.................................................................................... 461
21.8.2 Cancel selection ................................................................................... 462
21.8.3 Invert selection ..................................................................................... 462
21.8.4 Delete selected elements ..................................................................... 463
22 Quick Selection Table ........................................................................464

22.1 Information about the quick selection table................................................. 464
22.2 Create new quick selection table ................................................................ 464
22.3 Open quick selection table .......................................................................... 466
22.4 Show quick access for program start .......................................................... 467
22.5 Edit buttons ................................................................................................. 467
22.5.1 Configure button ................................................................................... 467
22.5.2 Delete button ........................................................................................ 471
22.6 Use the batch mode .................................................................................... 472
22.6.1 Activate/deactivate batch mode recording ............................................ 472
22.6.2 Execute batch mode............................................................................. 472
22.6.3 Delete batch mode ............................................................................... 474
22.7 Change view ............................................................................................... 474
22.7.1 Call homepage ..................................................................................... 474
22.7.2 Jump to previous page ......................................................................... 475
22.7.3 Activate/deactivate text display............................................................. 475
22.7.4 Close quick selection table window ...................................................... 476
23 Statistics .............................................................................................477
23.1 Information about the statistics ................................................................... 477
23.2 Mathematical fundamentals of statistics ..................................................... 477
23.2.1 Concept definitions ............................................................................... 477
23.2.2 Capability indexes ................................................................................ 478

Table of Contents
Process capability [Cp/ Cpk] and process performance [Pp / Ppk] (depending on
samples) 478
Machine capability (independent from samples) 478
Capability indexes of unilateral upwards tolerated features 478
Estimators of position and scattering 479
Model distribution: Normal distribution ...................................................479
Model distribution: Folded normal distribution ........................................480
Model distribution: Rayleigh distribution .................................................482
23.2.3 Sample size.......................................................................................... 484
23.3 Statistical evaluation of features ................................................................. 484
23.4 Adjust the statistical evaluation ................................................................... 485
23.4.1 Adjust filter settings .............................................................................. 485
23.4.2 Select evaluation method ..................................................................... 487
23.4.3 Change random sample scope ............................................................. 487
23.5 Display diagramsAdjust diagram settings ................................................... 488
23.5.1 Change limits ....................................................................................... 489
23.5.2 Change diagram limits.......................................................................... 490
23.5.3 Display overview .................................................................................. 491
23.5.4 Display data page................................................................................. 491
23.5.5 Display trend diagram .......................................................................... 492
23.5.6 Display histogram ................................................................................. 493
23.5.7 Display X bar chart ............................................................................... 494
23.5.8 Display R card ...................................................................................... 494
23.5.9 Display s card....................................................................................... 495
23.5.10 Export diagram ..................................................................................... 496
23.5.11 Copy diagram ....................................................................................... 497
23.5.12 Print diagram ........................................................................................ 498
23.6 Change view ............................................................................................... 499
23.6.1 Refresh statistics .................................................................................. 499
23.6.2 Close statistics window......................................................................... 499
23.7 Export features in Q-DAS format ................................................................ 500
24 Feature Data .......................................................................................502

24.1 Display Feature Data .................................................................................. 502
24.2 Record feature data .................................................................................... 502
24.3 Delete feature data ..................................................................................... 503
24.4 Close feature data window.......................................................................... 503
25 Offline ..................................................................................................505
25.1 Virtual joystick, click probe point on CAD model and simulation speed ...... 505
25.2 Simulation of a program process ................................................................ 506
26 General dialogs ..................................................................................507

26.1 Expression Editor........................................................................................ 507
26.1.1 Output element values ......................................................................... 508
26.1.2 Offset element values against each other............................................. 508
26.1.3 Using functions..................................................................................... 509
26.2 Direction dialog ........................................................................................... 510
26.3 Position dialog ............................................................................................ 511
27 Keyboard shortcuts ...........................................................................512

Table of Contents
Index .............................................................................................................515

Fluent User Interface
1 Fluent User Interface
The way how users interact with Metrosoft QUARTIS has been completely new designed. Thus the program
functions are easier to find and use than with traditional menus and toolbars.
The look and performance of these functions has been optimized and new technologies have been
introduced which allow a "search, select and click" instead of looking for and selecting functions in complex
dialogs.
One can work faster and better with the Metrosoft QUARTIS Fluent User Interface. Fluent simplifies the
access to the many powerful functions of Metrosoft QUARTIS.
• The ribbon arranges and presents functions just the way the user works.
• It is easier for the user to find powerful features.
• Due to the QUARTIS Fluent user interface, the user reaches faster and easier correct measurement
results, impressive inspection reports and meaningful statistics.
Metrosoft button Element window
Quick access toolbar Workspace
Ribbon Status Window
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Fluent User Interface 15

Fluent User Interface
1.1 Live preview

The live preview displays results of an editing step or a format change as soon as the user moves the pointer
over the results displayed in the catalog.
This new and dynamic function optimizes processes such as defining probing strategies and graphics views
as well creating layouts, formatting and editing of inspection reports.
Thus users achieve excellent results in a short time and with less effort.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Fluent User Interface 16

Metrosoft button
2 Metrosoft button
The Metrosoft QUARTIS Fluent user interface arranges all functions which are not assigned directly to
the measuring process in a central position of the user interface: the Metrosoft button.
The different windows in the workspace (Database, Program, Report, Features, Statistics, Quick Selection
Table) can be blended in if needed via the central Metrosoft button.
This offers two advantages: First, it helps the user to easier find these important features, and secondly the
core tasks of the application engineer are simplified. The ribbon helps you to focus on the work steps
measure, evaluate and report creation.
Further it acts a central entry point for all Metrosoft QUARTIS options and settings.
Overview Metrosoft Button
New Measurement database

Create new measurement database
Work piece
Create new work piece
Measurement
Create new measurement
Program
Create new program
Report
Create new report, new template or new report paper
Quick Selection Table
Create new quick selection table
Open Measurement database

Open measurement database
Work piece
Open work piece
Measurement
Open measurement
Program
Open program
Report
Open report, template or report paper
Open quick selection table
Save CAD Model

Save CAD model under a new name
Program
Save active program
Report
Save report, template or report paper
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Metrosoft button 17

Metrosoft button
Print Report
Print report, template or report paper
Import CAD Model

Import (convert) CAD models
Program
Import or link programs
VDA data
Import elements or points from VDA file
Export Program
Export programs
Coordinate system
Export difference of coordinate systems
Q-DAS data
Export features in Q-DAS format
VDA data
Export elements into CAD file
Work window Database

Display and edit database
Program
Display, edit and execute programs
Report
Display and edit report
Show quick access for program start
Feature Data
Display Feature Data
Statistics
Statistical evaluation of features
Extras External Programs

Configure external programs
QUARTIS Options Personalize

Change personal settings
Quick access
Adjust the quick access toolbar
Machine
Adjust machine settings
Measure
Adjust measurement settings
Features
Adjust evaluation settings
Graphics
Adjust graphics settings

Metrosoft button
Database
Adjust database settings
Statistics
Adjust statistics settings
Report
Adjust report settings
System
Adjust system settings
Info
Display general information about Metrosoft QUARTIS
2.1 New
2.1.1 Create new measurement database
This function creates and activates a new measurement database.
1. Click on the Metrosoft button.

2. Click on New.
3. Click on Measurement database.
4. Enter a unique name for the new measurement database.
If you want to save the measurement database in a different directory, switch to the corresponding
directory and click on OK in order to save and activate the measurement database.

Metrosoft button
2.1.2 Create new work piece

This function creates and activates a new work piece in the currently active database.

2. Click on New.
3. Click on Work piece.
4. Enter an ID (can only contain numbers and be max. 10 letters long). The next free ID is always
suggested.
5. Adjust and enter a description if needed.
In the example shown, properties such as description, drawing number and comment were
defined.

Metrosoft button
However, it is possible to save any amount of information (weight, material, customer, and so
forth) with the work piece. How to define additional properties is described in the topic Create user
defined properties.
6. Click on OK.
2.1.3 Create new measurement

This function creates and activates a new measurement in the currently active work piece.

2. Click on New.
3. Click on Measurement.

Metrosoft button
4. Enter an ID (can only contain numbers and be max. 10 letters long). The next free ID is always
suggested.
5. Adjust and enter a description if needed.
In the example shown, properties such as description, drawing number and comment were defined.
However, it is possible to save any amount of information (weight, material, customer, and so forth)
with the work piece. How to define additional properties is described in the topic Create user defined
properties.
6. Click on OK.
2.1.4 Create new program
This function creates a new program in the currently active work piece.

2. Click on New.
3. Click on Program.

Metrosoft button
4. Enter a program ID and select if you want to create a QUARTIS or DMIS program.
A new, empty program is created by clicking on Finish.
5. If you click on Next, an extended selection is available:
6. Select if you want to start with an empty program, a template, a copy or the mirroring of an already
existing program.
Hints for the option Start with mirroring of existing program.
A new program is created by clicking on Finish.
7. If you click on Next, another extended selection is available:
Steps 7 - 9 are not available for DMIS programs.

Metrosoft button
8. Define properties and corresponding values as needed.

9. Click on Finish.
2.1.5 Create new report, new template or new report paper
This function creates a new report, new template or new report paper.

2. Click on New.
3. Click on Report.

Metrosoft button
4. Select one of the following options:

Report
This option creates a new report. As report template the standard template defined in the QUARTIS
settings is used.
In case no report template was selected in the QUARTIS settings, no template is used at all.
Report from template
This option creates a new report using a report template.
The report template to be used can be selected in the subsequent dialog.
Report template
This option creates a new report template. This report template can later be used for the creation of a
new report by using the function Report from template.
Report paper
This option creates a new report paper.

Metrosoft button
2.1.6 Create new quick selection table

This function creates a new quick selection table.

2. Click on New.
3. Click on Quick Selection Table.
4. Enter a short description for the quick selection table.

5. Select if the quick selection table should contain 4, 9 or 12 buttons.
6. If a Homepage is created, check the corresponding checkbox.
The homepage can be directly opened using the function Call homepage.

Metrosoft button
Only one table can be configured as homepage.

If a new table is selected as homepage, the old table loses this status.
7. Click on OK.
2.2 Open
2.2.1 Open measurement database
This function opens and activates an existing measurement database.

2. Click on Open.
4. Select the desired measurement database.

Metrosoft button
2.2.2 Open work piece

This function opens and activates an existing work piece from the active database.

2. Click on Open.
3. Click on Work piece.
4. Select the corresponding work piece in the list.

5. Click on OK.

Metrosoft button
2.2.3 Open measurement

This function opens and activates an existing measurement from the active work piece.

2. Click on Open.
3. Click on Measurement.
4. Select the corresponding measurement in the list.

5. Click on OK.

Metrosoft button
2.2.4 Open program
This function opens and activates an existing program from the active work piece.

2. Click on Open.
4. Select the desired program from the list.

5. Click on OK.

Metrosoft button
2.2.5 Open report, template or report paper
This function opens an existing report, template or report paper.

2. Click on Open.
3. Click on Report.
4. Select the desired report or template and click on Open.
The report or template is loaded and can be edited.
2.2.6 Open quick selection table
This function opens an existing quick selection table from the active system database.

Metrosoft button

2. Click on Open.
4. Select the desired quick selection table.
The selected quick selection table can be defined as homepage in the dialog.
Only one table can be defined as homepage; thus an already existing homepage loses its status.
2.3 Save
2.3.1 Save CAD model under a new name
This function saves an imported and altered CAD model under a new name.

2. Click on Save.
3. Click on CAD Model.
4. Enter the new file name for the CAD model, change the data type if needed and save it.
The CAD model can be saved as ACIS® file in binary (*.sab), text (*.sat) or auxiliary file format
(*.sax).

Metrosoft button
2.3.2 Save active program
This function saves the active program into the database.

2. Click on Save.
4. The current program is saved into the database.
A QUARTIS program is always automatically saved into the database whenever the record or edit
mode is terminated.

Metrosoft button
2.3.3 Save report, template or report paper

This function saves the currently active report or template (report template or report paper).

2. Click on Save
3. Click on Report.
4. Enter a filename for the report or template and click on Save.
The file name of a report can also be defined using the expression editor. In doing so, one can for
example, add the current measurement ID to the file name of the report.
With expressions one can automatically compile report file names using already stored information
from the database.
The expression editor is opened by clicking on the button Expression editor....
All available fields are listed in the expression editor. The spelling of a file name using variables is
described in the topic Expression Editor.
A report can be saved in different formats:
• QUARTIS reports (*QrtReport): Saves the report in the internal Metrosoft QUARTIS format
• PDF (*pdf)
• Text (spaces-formatted) (*.txt)
• CSV (separators-separated) (*.csv)
• QUARTIS report templates (*.QrtReportTpl): Graphics and tables are automatically replaced
with the corresponding place holders

Metrosoft button
2.4 Print
2.4.1 Print report, template or report paper
This function prints the currently active report or template (report template or report paper)

2. Click on Print
3. Click on Report.
4. Adjust the printer settings if needed.

Metrosoft button
2.5 Import
2.5.1 Import (convert) CAD models
This function imports a surface data record (CAD model) into the active work piece.
Thereby the path and file name of the imported model is saved in the database under CAD models.

2. Click on Import.
4. Enter a description for the CAD model.

5. Adjust, if necessary, the converter options for CAD files.
6. Select using Add... additional CAD models.

Metrosoft button
It is possible to select multiple CAD models at the same time.

All imported CAD models including path and file name are now displayed in the dialog.
7. Adjust the list of CAD models using Modify, Delete and Delete all.
8. Select a model and a function in the contextual menu (right mouse button).
Change color... assigns a new color to the model using the color dialog. When adding a model, the
default color is assigned to it. Auxiliary files have a fixed color.
Standard auxiliary file sets an auxiliary file as standard auxiliary file. Newly added auxiliary
elements (eg curves) are added to this file.
9. Click on OK in order to load the CAD models.
A progress bar is displayed during the loading of CAD models. It is possible to abort long loading
processes within this dialog. CAD models not loaded are marked with a cross in the dialog.

Metrosoft button
Converter options for CAD files
In this dialog different options for the conversion of CAD files can be set.
Most of these options are used in order to correct erroneous and inaccurate CAD files and make them
useable for the ACIS® Graphics Kernel.
General
Calculate facets
When this switch is enabled a file with facets (*.SAF) for graphic representation of the model is created after
the end of CAD file conversion. If the facet file is present at the time of loading the model, the model will be
displayed faster. Through the submenus Fine/Medium/Rough one can select the display quality for which the
facets should be created.
Save as binary file
When the ACIS® files are saved in binary format (*.SAB), a CAD file is loaded about twice as fast. Thus this
option should always be active. Moreover, it has no effects on the duration of the conversion process. If this
option is not activated, the file is saved in text format (*.SAT). This is reasonable only for the error search or
data exchange between various computer systems.
Save data in downwards compatible format
This switch must be set so that the converted models can also be read and processed in older Metrosoft
QUARTIS versions. Data is then saved in ACIS version 20.
Create local copy of file
This option saves the converted file in the "Common Data" directory instead in the location of the source file.
Adjust data during conversion
If this switch is set, then the CAD data is adjusted to the high precision of ACIS® during the conversion.
Additionally, errors in the structure of the CAD model are corrected. This option can slow down the
conversion considerably.
To accelerate the conversion, you must disable this option. This option applies to the conversion of
CATIAV4, STEP and ProE files.
Repair data subsequently
If this switch is activated, the converted data is then tested, repaired and simplified. This helps avoiding
errors at the time of display or intersection of models. This operation can take a long time.

Metrosoft button
Select CAD coordinate system

If this option is active, then the names of the coordinate systems included in the CAD model are listed in a
dialog during the import of CAD data. In this dialog the user can select which coordinate system should be
used.
If only one coordinate system is saved in the CAD data, or if the option is switched off, then the dialog is not
displayed.
Convert surface orientation
If this option is active, the orientation of the surface (front- and backside) will be kept during the conversion.
The surface orientation is displayed in the graphics,
Take over assembly group structure
If this option is active, the individual parts (*.PRT, *.CATPart) are converted into individual ACIS files an one
single assembly group file (*.SAG) during the conversion of assemblies in ProE (*.ASM) and CATIA V5
(*.CATProduct) format. During the import of the assembly group file, the corresponding ACIS files are added
to the graphics. The individual parts then can be displayed/hidden in the graphics via the layer management.
The layer structure of the parts remains.
Filter
• Convert trimmed surfaces
• Convert free surfaces
• Convert free curves
• Convert free points
• Convert PMI
This option allows you to switch on or off the translation of the corresponding elements.
Free surfaces are the surfaces that are not bordered by trimming curves. Free curves and free points are
curves/edges or points that are not part of any surface.
These switches enable excluding unnecessary elements from the conversion and reducing the size of the
model file.
Convert PMI
With this option, the metrological relevant PMI (Product Manufacturing Information) data contained in CATIA
V5 models is converted and directly displayed in the 3D graphics. This information (dimensioning with
tolerances and general drawing notes) is placed as CAD objects (lines and text) on their own layer. The layer
names correspond with the defined views in the CATIA V5 model.
This PMI information is displayed as graphic elements. In order to be able to identify the tolerances
and references assigned to the surfaces and geometry elements, a viewer that displays the
relations of the references, tolerances and CAD elements has to be used.
Definitions file for user format

Select here the file where the definition of the user format is saved.
The structure of such a definition file is described under User format converter.
Standard
The options for the conversion of CAD files are set back to their default values.
OK
The set conversion options are taken over.

Metrosoft button
2.5.2 Import or link programs

This functions imports a program which is available as *.QrtProg or *.dmi file into the current active work
piece. It is also possible to link the program to the work piece.

2. Click on Import.
4. Select the desired program and click on Open. It is possible to select multiple programs at the same
time.
5. Select the program type.
Only QUARTIS (*.QrtProg) or DMIS (*.dmi) programs can be imported or linked.

Metrosoft button
6. With Add... further programs can be added to the import list.

7. In order to link the selected program with the work piece, check the checkbox Link. Else the
programs will be imported into the database.
If the program is linked, only file name and path are saved as a link into the database.
8. With the checkbox Link all one can determine if all programs from the list are to be linked or
imported.
9. Click on Import / Link.
10. Green indicates that the import or the linkage was successful. Red indicates that an error occurred
during the import / linkage.
11. Click on Close.

Metrosoft button
2.5.3 Import elements or points from VDA file
This function imports element or point data from an ASCII file in VDA-FS format.
The VDA file must comply with the specifications according to the description of the VDA surface interface
(VDAFS) Version 2.0 of the VDA association.
QUARTIS can interpret data in PSET, MDI and CIRCLE format.

2. Click on Import.
3. Click on VDA data.
4. Select the VDA file.
5. The selected VDA file can be loaded into the Windows text editor by clicking button.
The text editor has to be closed before continuing working with QUARTIS!

Metrosoft button
6. Define the start position (VDA name or line number) for the reading of the selected VDA file (if the field
is left empty, the start position corresponds to the file beginning) and the end position (VDA name or
line number) (if the field is left empty, the end positions corresponds to the file end).
The element descriptions created during export are used as names (e.g. "S2M3").
The names defined in QUARTIS are only exported as comment and are, therefore, no longer
relevant for import.
7. Define the starting number for the imported elements and the compensating model or element for
saving in the database. The VDA name is taken over in Metrosoft QUARTIS as element name
8. Select which elements correspond with the elements defined in the dialog.
If different elements are saved in a VDA file, they have to be imported in individual steps with the
correct selection of the compensation element and the correct area. If an element cannot be
computed due to the selected compensation model, the import will be aborted. Already imported
elements remain saved.
9. Click on OK.
2.6 Export
2.6.1 Export programs
This function exports existing programs from the active work piece.
Exported QUARTIS programs are encoded into the QUARTIS internal format.

2. Click on Export.

Metrosoft button
4. Select the desired program. It is possible to select multiple programs at the same time.
5. Click on OK.
6. Click on Export file....

If needed, change storage location and file name in the dialog that opens.
It is possible to add more program from the current work piece to the export dialog by clicking on
Add....
7. Click on Export.
The programs from the list are exported.
8. Click on Close.

Metrosoft button
2.6.2 Export difference of coordinate systems
This function compares the position of two work piece coordinate systems with each other. The result of this
comparison can be exported into a file.

2. Click on Export.
3. Click on Coordinate system.
4. Select the reference and work piece coordinate system.

5. The following values appear in the mentioned order (separated by a comma):
• Name of the work piece coordinate system
• Object description (W=work piece)
• Related object
• Unit (M: millimeter, I: inch)
• Work piece rotated (1=rotated)

Metrosoft button
• Position of work piece changer

• Offset in the X direction
• Offset in the Y direction
• Offset in the Z direction
• Turning angle around the X axis
• Turning angle around the Y axis
• Turning angle around the Z axis
• Carriage Return - Line Feed
Example:
WKSZY,W,,M,1,0,4.482877,21.906707,30.000000,0.000000,0.000000,15.000000
The format relates to the interface standard AGIESOFT ML 2.0 <AGIE-ASCII3>.
6. Adjust, if needed, storage position and file name.
The file name can be automatically generated with expressions using already available information
from the database.
The expression editor is opened by clicking on the command button Expression editor... .
All available fields are listed in the expression editor. The file name notation when using expressions
is described in the topic Expression editor.
Three file extensions are available for the export, however, the output format is always the same no
matter which file extension is selected:
• QUARTIS Format (*.mes)
• Electrode (*.e)
• Work piece (*.w).
The filename can contain a placeholder (* (a star as placeholder will be replaced by the measurement
number) or ? (the question mark represents a placeholder for a single cipher. Thus for a measurement number
in the range of 1 to 9999 4 question marks are required (????). Values under 1000 are complemented with
leading zeros (e.g. 0001))) which will be replaced by the current measurement number.
7. Click on OK.
2.6.3 Export features in Q-DAS format
This function exports features from the database into a Q-DAS file.
The data then can be imported and evaluated with the statistics package QS-STAT from the company Q-
DAS

Metrosoft button

2. Click on Export.
3. Click on Q-DAS data.
4. Select the features to be exported. If all features are to be exported, the checkbox Always all
features can be activated.
5. Select the Q-DAS key file (in this file the Q-DAS fields to be exported are configured).

Metrosoft button
This key file (Q-DAS field configuration) can be customized with the button.
6. Adjust, if needed, the storage position and file name of the Q-DAS file.
from the database.
One can choose between *.dfq format (description and values in one file) or *.dfd, *.dfx format
(description and values in two files) for the export.
7. Define if all measurements or only the current measurement are exported.
If only the current measurement is exported, the following additional options can be selected: attach
to file (the data is attached to the selected Q-DAS file), new file (a new file with the same name and next
measurement number is created) or overwrite file (the selected Q-DAS file is overwritten with the new
values).
8. Select the export format (compressed/uncompressed) and the K0002 attribute with missing
measurement values. If the attribute 255 (measurement allocation remains) is selected, the gaps
with missing measurement values are not filled. If the attribute 256 (Measurement allocation does
not remain) is selected, the gaps with missing measurement values are filed with the next following
measurement values.
9. Click on OK.
Q-DAS field configuration
In this dialog keys can be configured, this means one can define which fields are to be included in the Q-
DAS export file.
Only selected keys ( ) are exported.
The following rules are to be followed.
Types of fields
Fields with pre-defined content The user does not have any direct influence on the field content (for e.g. K2001 –
feature number). The field is automatically defined by Metrosoft QUARTIS.
Fields with editable content The user can define the contents of the fields. The field content can also be
queried or modified during the export. Therefore the switch <query (before
Export)> must have been set for the corresponding fields.
Mandatory fields Fields the user cannot unselect.

Metrosoft button
Query (prior to export)

If this switch has been activated for a field, it is queried again prior to the export and the content can be
changed.
The condition for this is the edit ability and selection ( ) of the field for the export.
Variable for field content

A pre-defined variable can be used as field content. A corresponding variable can be assigned to the
selected field with the selection list via the right mouse button.
During the export the field content will automatically be replaced by the current value.
Local menu (right mouse button)
Edit QUARTIS expression... Opens the QUARTIS expression dialog where expressions and
variables can be edited.
QUARTIS fields A variable for the field content can be selected from a list of predefined
variables.
Display all fields A list of all available fields is displayed
Hide unused fields Only the selected fields are listed.
Display only query fields Only those fields that can be queried again prior to the export are
displayed.
Add
After making a selection in the "Key" list, one can add a not yet existing K-field to the existing report list by
using the "Add" button. Thereafter, you can also edit the field content and the field name.
Save only selected fields

If this option is activated, only these fields are saved in the key file that are selected ( ).
2.6.4 Export elements into CAD file

This function exports element data into the VDA-FS, IGES and ACIS format.
VDA-FS and IGES are data formats for the exchange of geometrical descriptions between different
evaluation and CAD/CAM systems.
ACIS is the format of the 3D modeling kernel from Spatial. This format is used by Metrosoft QUARTIS and
can be imported directly. This way, an exported curve can be used as nominal curve for comparative
measurements for example.
Probe points are saved with corrected radius in relation to the work piece surface. Probe points are not
projected into the reference.
For the export into a VDA-FS or IGES file, the data is exported either in millimeter or inch
according to the settings defined in System – Measurement units.

Metrosoft button

2. Click on Export.
3. Click on Elements.
4. Select the format (ACIS, VDA-FS, IGES).

5. Select elements (all listed elements are output; the element in the left element window is suggested).
6. Select the coordinate system to be used for the export.
If no coordinate system is selected, reference sphere coordinates are used for the export.
7. Enter the complete path and name for the export file.
The file specification consists of the predefined default export directory and along the file name. The
file name is derived from the export format, the work piece and measurement number. As an
extension, the file extension of the corresponding export format us used, for example: VDA
FS_2_12.vda.

Metrosoft button
If a file with the same name already exists, it will be overwritten.
When exporting into VDA-FS and IGES format, more settings can be entered.
8. Define if the selected data records are to be appended at the VDA file or if a new file with the
entered name is to be created.
9. Define the VDA formats for the export. The following formats are available:
• Point sequence(PSET) (corrected coordinate values without normal direction)
• Point-Vector-sequence (MDI) (corrected co-ordinate values, normal direction away from the material)
• Point (POINT) (individual corrected coordinate value without normal direction)
10. Define if circles are to be output as element (CIRCLE (center, radius, 2 direction vectors in the circle
plane, arch – start angle, arch-end angle)).
11. Define if the selected coordinate system (PCS) is to be written in VDA format TMAT in front of the
elements in the VDA file.

Metrosoft button
12. Select the IGES formats for the export. The following formats are available:
• Point sequence (106-2) (corrected coordinate values without normal direction)
• Point-Vector-sequence (106-3) (corrected coordinate values, normal direction away from material)
• Point (116) (individual corrected coordinate value without normal direction)
13. Define if elements are to be output as Element (100) (center, radius, 2 direction vectors in the circular
plane, arc start angle, arc end angle).
14. Define if curves are to be output as Spline (126) (support points, nodes and weights).
15. Click on OK in order to create the export file.

Metrosoft button
2.7 Work window

2.7.1 Display and edit database
This function displays the Database window in the workspace.

2. Click on Work window.
3. Click on Database.
4. The Database window is displayed in the workspace.

Metrosoft button
2.7.2 Display, edit and execute programs

This function displays the Program window in the workspace.

4. The Program window is displayed in the workspace.
2.7.3 Display and edit report

This function displays the Report window in the workspace.

Metrosoft button
2. Click on Work window

3. Click on Report.
4. The Report window is displayed in the workspace.
2.7.4 Show quick access for program start
This function displays the Quick Selection Table window in the workspace.

4. The Quick Selection Table window is now displayed in the workspace.
In case no quick selection table has been defined yet, an empty work window is opened.

Metrosoft button
2.7.5 Display Feature Data

With this function the feature data window is displayed in the work window.

3. Click on Feature Data.
4. The Feature Data window is displayed in the workspace.
2.7.6 Statistical evaluation of features

This function displays the Statistics window in the workspace.

Metrosoft button

3. Click on Statistics.
4. The Statistics window is displayed in the workspace.
2.8 Extras
2.8.1 Configure external programs
This function allows you to configure external programs.

3. Click on Extras.
4. Enter the file name of the application program, including the path name.

Metrosoft button
Only an existing application can be specified.

If you do not know the name or the path of the file, use the browse button to open the file selection
dialogue field.
Specify the name under which the application is to be entered in the menu by entering a description.
If you insert a & before a letter, it will be used as a shortcut. Only ONE (1) short cut may be used!
A clear description must be given, i.e. two applications CANNOT have the same description. If no
description is specified, the file name is used as such.
5. If the application has start parameters, you may define them here.
If you enter a $ sign in this icon, you will be asked after the parameters when starting this
application.
6. Define the working directory to be used by the application.

Only existing directories can be defined!
7. Activate this check box as symbol if you would like the application program to be reduced to one
symbol when started.
If the option wait until program terminates is activated, one cannot proceed working with Metrosoft
QUARTIS until the external program is terminated.
This option is especially used within programs in order to continue the program only after an external
program has been fully executed.
8. If an already existing selection is to be deleted from the list Installed applications, click on New. In
addition, the input fields for program name, description, program parameters and operating directory
are deleted.
The input fields for program name, description, program parameters and operating directory are to
accepted, click on Accept. A new entry in the list is created or an existing entry is updated.
Program name, description and operating directory are checked for their validity.
In order to delete a selected application, click on Delete.
All already installed applications are listed in the fields Installed applications.
If you mark an entry, its specifications in the input field's program name, description, program
parameters and operating directory are transferred so that alterations can be performed. The
alterations or entry of a new application must be confirmed with Accept.
9. Click on OK.
Note that all alterations are not definitely accepted until the input mask is exited with OK.

Metrosoft button
2.9 QUARTIS Options

2.9.1 Change personal settings
This function allows you to customize the personal user settings.

2. Click on QUARTIS Options.
3. Click on Personalize.
4. Edit name and abbreviation.

Metrosoft button
It is possible to create user profiles in the Metrosoft QUARTIS configuration program in the tab
User. Each user profile consists out of a name, an abbreviation, a role (Administrator or program
executor) and a password.
If the function Activate user management in the Metrosoft QUARTIS configuration program is
activated, all users have to log in with name and password when QUARTIS is started. It is not
possible to edit name and abbreviation as described in step 4. Thus one can for example secure,
that the correct name or the correct abbreviation is displayed in the field tester in the report.
The user role Program executor limits the access to execution of programs via the quick selection
table.
An Administrator has complete access to all functions of QUARTIS.
5. Customize the user interface according to your needs.

6. Click on OK.
2.9.2 Adjust the quick access toolbar
These functions allow you to assign individual functions to the Quick Access Toolbar.


Metrosoft button
3. Click on Quick access.

4. Select the desired function from the function tree.
5. The selected function is assigned to the quick access toolbar by clicking on .
6. The order of the functions can be adjusted using and . The selected function can be deleted
from the quick access toolbar by clicking on .
7. The toolbar for the quick access is displayed above the ribbon tabs by default. The quick access
toolbar can also be displayed below the ribbon just above of the workspace.
8. Click on OK.

Metrosoft button
2.9.3 Adjust machine settings
With these functions the machine settings, the simulation of a program sequence and the collision detection
can be adjusted.

3. Click on Machine.
4. Adjust the settings for
• Machine
• Joystick direction
• Probe system

Metrosoft button
• Reference sphere
• and Temperature compensation.
5. Select Gauss (the deviation results out of a gauss error distribution curve whose 6-time standard deviation
(6s) is defined as scattering range. In contrast to the rectangular distribution values outside the range of
scattering can be generated) or rectangle (the deviation moves within the predetermined range of scattering
(interval), this means the probe point varies (±0.5 * interval) around the target value) for the scattering
distribution during the simulation and enter the scattering range (the largest possible interval is 10.000
mm).
During the simulation probe points can be afflicted with errors (deviation to the target value). The
deviation occurs in the probing direction. The amount of deviation results out of a random number
generator which either delivers normal (Gauss) or uniformly distributed (Rectangle) values.
6. Activate the collision detection if needed and enter the safety distance (the safety distance is added to
the radius of the measuring sphere and has to be smaller than the measuring and retracting distance, else
collision will be calculated at all times).
The collision detection can occur during the element measurement.
In order to do so, activate the corresponding checkbox and adjust the safety distance if needed.
7. Click on OK.
2.9.4 Adjust measurement settings
This function allows you to adjust the measurement settings. It is possible to define the range and the start
values for the ID generator as well as the number of probe points for each individual element type.


Metrosoft button
3. Click on Measure.
4. Click on Adjust.
The measure settings are displayed.
2.9.5 Adjust evaluation settings
These functions allow you to adjust the default tolerance settings.


Metrosoft button
3. Click on Features.
4. Click on Adjust.
The default tolerance settings are displayed.
2.9.6 Adjust graphics settings
This function allows you to define the graphics display settings.


Metrosoft button
3. Click on Graphics.
4. Click on Adjust.
The graphics settings are displayed.
2.9.7 Adjust database settings
This function allows you to adjust the database settings.


Metrosoft button
4. Click on Adjust.
The database settings are displayed.
2.9.8 Adjust statistics settings
This function allows you to adjust the settings of the statistical diagrams.


Metrosoft button
4. Click on Adjust.
The diagram settings are displayed.
2.9.9 Adjust report settings
These functions allow you to adjust the report settings.


Metrosoft button
3. Click on Report.
4. Adjust the language and template settings.
5. Adjust the color and warning limit settings.
6. Scroll down using the scrollbar.
7. Adjust the auxiliary grid settings.

8. Click on OK.

Metrosoft button
2.9.10 Adjust system settings
These functions allow you to adjust the system settings.

3. Click on System.
4. Adjust the date and time specifications.
5. Adjust the measurement units settings.
6. Adjust the acoustic signal settings.
7. Scroll down using the scrollbar.

Metrosoft button
8. Adjust the CAD converter settings.

9. Adjust the directory settings.
10. Click on OK.
2.9.11 Display general information about Metrosoft QUARTIS
This function displays general information about Metrosoft QUARTIS.


Metrosoft button
3. Click on Info.
4. Click on OK.

Quick Access Toolbar
3 Quick Access Toolbar
One can now work much more efficiently with the new ribbon than with traditional toolbars. Nevertheless it
may be desirable to be able to access certain functions directly.
Therefore the Fluent User Interface offers the quick access toolbar. This toolbar allows access to single
functions directly.
The quick access toolbar can be individually customized using the QUARTIS Options or by clicking on .
Intermediate point
Displays or hides the function Insert intermediate point.
Zoom all
Displays or hides the function Zoom all.
Zoom on CAD Model

Displays or hides the function Zoom on CAD Model and element.
More commands...
Opens the Quartis options for the quick access toolbar.
Display below ribbon

The toolbar for the quick access is displayed above the ribbon right next to the Metrosoft button by default.
It is possible to display it below the ribbon directly above the workspace.
Minimize ribbon
Minimizes the ribbon.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Quick Access Toolbar 73

Ribbon
4 Ribbon
The required functions of a particular work step for a measuring task (machine and devices, measure
elements, evaluate measurement) are divided into the three main tabs Machine, Measure, Evaluate in the
Metrosoft QUARTIS ribbon. They provide those functions which are relevant for the current work step.
All available functions within these main tabs are grouped using catalogs. The three main tabs are completed
with contextual tabs. These contextual tabs provide further functions for the currently active work window.
1. Main Tabs
• Machine
Machine, Probe System, Reference Sphere, Articulating probe system and Stylus changing
system
• Measure
Measure, Construct and Align
• Evaluate
Default settings, Standard, Form and Position
2. Groups
3. Contextual Tabs
4.1 Groups
Groups create the core of the ribbon. They provide all existing functions. The last and most frequently used
functions are directly visible and selectable. Functions that are not directly visible in the ribbon can be
selected from the catalog by clicking on . Catalogs provide access to the complete range of functions
belonging to a group.
1. Active main tab.

2. Opened catalog of the group Measure.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Ribbon 74

Ribbon
4.2 Contextual tabs

Certain function groups are only relevant when the corresponding work window is active or a function is
executed in one of the three main tabs. These functions are arranged in the contextual tabs.
For example, the functions for the measurement of an element are not relevant until an element is being
measured and therefore one switches to the corresponding main tab and calls the particular function. The
different functions and settings for the measurement of an element are not displayed till then in the
contextual tab. As soon as the measurement is finished, the contextual tab disappears again.
Through contextual tabs it is even easier for the user to find the needed commands. For every working step
Metrosoft QUARTIS only displays the relevant commands.
1. Active main tab

2. Contextual tabs
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Ribbon 75

Element window
5 Element window
The element window is an important element of the QUARTIS user interface.

All information about a measured element is displayed within the element window. Elements from the
database, that are required for further work steps, as for example the construction or the alignment, can be
selected in the element window.
Element type, calculation method and measuring type are

displayed under Type.
If a description is added to the ID during the measurement of
an element it will be displayed under Description. This
description can later be edited.
The reference used during the measuring of the element is
displayed under Reference.
All nominal and actual values of the active element are

displayed in the register Geometry.
The nominal values can be edited.
All statistical information about the element is displayed in the
register Details.
All points of the active element are displayed in the register
Points.
If features were created automatically during the

measurement of the active element, they are displayed
including their tolerances and deviations in the register
Tolerances and Deviations.
If no automatic features were created, only the deviations will
be displayed.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Element window 76

Element window
5.1 Display previous element

In order to load the previous element into the corresponding element window, click on .
5.2 Display next element

In order to load the next element into the corresponding element window, click on .
5.3 Load element in element window (via list)

In order to load an element from the database in the active element window, click on .

Element window
5.4 Load element in element window (via mouse tool)
By activating the mouse tool one can click the desired element in the graphics in order to load it into the
left element window. Thereby the edge of the element can be clicked.
After the element is loaded, the clicked element is displayed in the left element window and the previous
element is moved to the right element window.
If the corresponding element info labels are displayed, one can also click on the info box in order
to load the corresponding element into the element window. In doing so, the mouse tool does not
necessarily be activated.
5.5 Exchange contents of element window
The elements are exchanged from the left and right element window by clicking on .

Element window
5.6 Lock element in right element window
The element in the right element window can be locked by clicking on .
This function is useful if the same element is going to be linked subsequently with other elements.
5.7 Edit element

The description and the nominal values of the element in the active element window can be edited by
clicking on . After all desired changes are done on has to click again on . Thereby a query dialog is
opened in which can be selected if the changes should be adopted or not.
What the different characters mean is described in the topic Element description.
If nominal values are changed, the deviation of their automatically created features in the register
Tolerances and Deviations will be recalculated.

Workspace
6 Workspace
The workspace is arranged in the center of the application and therefore in the middle of the field of vision.
The graphics window is always displayed. All other work windows as Program, Database, Report, Feature
Data, Quick Selection table and Statistics can be blended in using the Metrosoft Button and can be docked
anywhere in the workspace or placed free floating on the desktop. Thus the user interface can be
customized to the individual needs of the user.
Multiple work windows can be displayed at the same time. Individual work windows can be placed on the
second monitor. The user decides.
If needed the element window and the status window can be collapsed. Thus the workspace can be
displayed even bigger.
6.1 Customize workspace

Metrosoft QUARTIS enables you now to hide or display work windows, such as Program, Database, Feature
Data, Quick Selection Table and Statistics. Work windows can even be docked anywhere in the workspace
Therefore the user interface can be customized to one's individuals needs.
According to one's preferences, multiple work windows can be displayed at the same time or individual work
windows can be placed on an additional monitor.
The workspace can be customized to the user's needs. Metrosoft QUARTIS is out most flexible due to
docking technology. The work area can be doubled by an additional monitor.
In order to customize the user interface, click with the right mouse button on an empty space on the ribbon.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Workspace 80

Workspace
Customize toolbar for quick access ....

Opens the QUARTIS options for the quick access toolbar.
Display quick access toolbar below the ribbon

The toolbar for the quick access is displayed above the ribbon right next to the Metrosoft button by default.
It is possible to display it below the ribbon directly above the workspace.
Minimize ribbon
Minimizes the ribbon.
Fix window
All work windows can now be moved out of the user interface using drag & drop and then be placed
wherever needed.
The element and status window can also be collapsed by clicking on .
The collapsed in window is displayed when the mouse pointer is moved over the folded in tab. By clicking on
it is displayed again.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Workspace 81

Status window
7 Status window
The status window displays all relevant states of Metrosoft QUARTIS at once.
One click on the display of a particular information enables you to change the corresponding state.
7.1 Machine mode display
Disconnected
Metrosoft QUARTIS is disconnected from the machine; it is possible to work in offline mode.
Connected
Metrosoft QUARTIS is connected with the machine; it is possible to work in online made.
By clicking on this function the machine is either set to online (connected) or offline (disconnected)
mode.
7.2 Display of currently loaded work piece
By clicking on this command button an existing work piece is loaded (from the database) and activated.
7.3 Display of currently loaded measurement
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Status window 82

Status window
By clicking on this command button an existing measurement can be loaded (from the active work piece) and
be activated.
7.4 Program information
The currently loaded program, current state and line number of the program are displayed in this command
button.
Status indication
Program is executed.
Program is in pause mode.
Program is stopped.
Program is in recording mode.
Program is in edit mode.
The status of the program can be changed by clicking on the symbol.
Display of current program
By clicking on this command button an existing program can be loaded (from the active work piece) and
activated.
No program loaded.
7.5 Display of currently loaded reference sphere
By clicking on this command button a reference sphere that already has been created and saved in the
database is loaded.
No reference sphere loaded.

Status window
7.6 Display of current probe head position
By clicking on this command button the position current articulating probe system can be rotated onto the
desired position.
7.7 Display of currently loaded probe system
By clicking on this command button a probe system that already has been calibrated and saved in the
database can be loaded
No probe system loaded.
The current probe system has been altered (probe head was rotated, configuration was changed
or a stylus was picked up in another slot).
7.8 Display of currently loaded stylus and probe mode
By clicking on this command button, the stylus can be changed.
Stylus is not calibrated.
By clicking on one of these command buttons the probe mode can be changed.
7.9 Display of current coordinate system
Display of the current coordinate system (PCS/PLCS).
Display of the current work piece coordinate system (PCS).
No PCS loaded.
Display of the current pallet coordinate system (PLCS). When a pallet coordinate system is
created, the date and time when it has been saved into the database is displayed in the status

Status window
window.
No PLCS loaded.
By clicking on this command button an already saved coordinate system can be loaded from the database
and be activated.
7.10 Average machine/work piece temperature display
The display of the temperature compensation is only visible if it is activated in the QUARTIS
configuration program.
The temperature of the machine is beyond the specified limits.
The temperature of the work piece is beyond the specified limits.
7.11 Virtual joystick, click probe point on CAD model and simulation
speed
The machine can be operated in offline mode using the virtual joystick.
These functions are only displayed if Metrosoft QUARTIS is in offline mode (not connected to the
machine).
1Virtual joystick
.
2Click probe point on CAD model

.
3Simulation speed
.
Virtual joystick
The virtual joystick can be operated in several different ways.

Status window
Clicking in axis direction

The clicked axis direction (arrow) is colorized yellow.
One click moves the machine 1mm.
If the Ctrl-key is pressed at the same time, the machine is moved 0.1 mm.
If the Shift-key is pressed at the same time, the machine moves 10 mm.
Positioning in X, Y or Z direction
Position the mouse pointer on the middle button of the virtual joystick.
Depending on the position of the mouse pointer on the button, the X and Y or the Z direction is blended
out. Now draw the virtual joystick in the desired direction by holding down the left mouse button and
moving the mouse in the corresponding direction.
The speed can be set with the slider on the right side.
The current position of the machine is displayed in the coordinate display below the virtual joystick.
Click probe point on CAD model

If this command button is activated one can adopt a measuring point directly from the CAD model by clicking
on it.
Simulation speed
The speed of the machine can be set with the slider.
7.12 Current coordinates display
This drop down list allows you to switch the coordinate display between values from a work piece, pallet,
reference or machine coordinate system
Thereby the coordinate system display will be refreshed automatically. The number of decimal places can be
defined in the system settings.

Status window
By clicking on the coordinate display with the left mouse button one can position the machine.
By clicking on the coordinate display with the right mouse button one can switch between Cartesian
coordinates, spherical coordinates and cylinder coordinates.
7.13 Display of active measurement units
The measurements units displayed in this display can be changed in the system settings.

Database
8 Database
8.1 Information about the database

Metrosoft QUARTIS works with Microsoft Access databases in which all measuring relevant data is saved.
Thus measurements can be reproduced and evaluated again at a later point of time.
There are 2 different databases in Metrosoft QUARTIS: a measurement database and a system database.
The measurement database contains all work pieces with their corresponding programs, CAD models,
graphics views, measurements and features. This database is machine-independent and can be created and
selected in Metrosoft QUARTIS.
Probe systems, reference spheres, articulating probing systems, pallet coordinate systems and quick
selection tables are stored in the database. This database is machine-dependent and can be selected in the
configuration program off Metrosoft QUARTIS.
8.2 Create new measurement database

This function creates and activates a new measurement database.

2. Click on New.
4. Enter a unique name for the new measurement database.
If you want to save the measurement database in a different directory, switch to the corresponding
directory and click on OK in order to save and activate the measurement database.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Database 88

Database
8.3 Open measurement database

This function opens and activates an existing measurement database.

2. Click on Open.
4. Select the desired measurement database.
8.4 Display and edit database

This function displays the Database window in the workspace.

Database

4. The Database window is displayed in the workspace.
8.5 Adjust database settings

This function allows you to adjust the database settings.
1. Activate the work window Database.

2. Activate the contextual tab Database.
3. Click on the command button Settings.
4. Select if the deleting (any deleting of database entries must be once again confirmed before it takes effect)
and/or the modification and copying (any editing of database entries must be once again confirmed before it
takes effect) should be confirmed.
5. Select if QUARTIS should create an automatic database backup (a database backup is automatically
created under the name of "Databasename. qrtmeasdb.backupX ". X stands for the number of the back-up
copy, and 01 relates to the latest one. When the maximum number of back-up copies is reached the oldest copy
is deleted before the creation of a new one) during start up or exiting QUARTIS and how many number
of copies (maximum number of backup copies, when this number is reached the oldest ones are overwritten).

Database
Finally one can save the security copy in the same directory as the database or select a different
directory.
This function does not anyhow replace a broader data back-up concept, as it only backs up the
current database and regularly overwrites the back-up copy.
6. Click on OK.
8.6 Create user defined properties

It is possible to save any additional information together with each work piece and measurement. For
example, one can save which user executed the measurement and on what machine. This information can
automatically be output in the report.


Database
3. Select the line work piece or measurement. Depending on what is selected, additional information is
saved with the work piece or the measurement.
4. Click with the right mouse button on the title line in the data view.
5. Select User defined.
6. Click on Add.
7. Enter the corresponding information into the empty fields:
Column ID: Define the ID for the user defined property. The ID differentiates between different
properties. The same ID can therefore only be assigned once.
Column Name: Define the name of the user defined property. The term defined is, e.g., displayed as
column title in the database or queried with this name when creating a new work piece or
measurement.
Column Default: Optionally, one can define a default value. If a new work piece or measurement is
created at a later time, the corresponding property is already predefined with this value. The value
can be changed. It is also possible to enter expressions.
8. Click on OK.
The added property is now displayed as an additional column in the database. If a new work piece
or measurement is created, the value of this property can be defined.

Database
8.7 Edit database

8.7.1 Copy data
This function copies data out from the database.

It is possible to select and copy multiple data records.

3. Select the desired data record.
4. Click on the command button Copy.
8.7.2 Paste data
This function pastes data from the clipboard into the database.


Database
3. Mark the position where the data from the clipboard are to be inserted.
4. Click on the command button Paste.
Conflict during copying

If a conflict occurs during copying (data record with same ID exists already) the following dialog will be
displayed.
1. Select the source database (from which database the data are copied) and the target database (in
which the data will be copied into).
2. Select if a dialog is displayed in case of a conflict (ID is already taken) or if the data is to be
overwritten automatically. It is also possible to skip (not copying).
3. Select the work piece to be copied.
4. Enter a work piece ID for the work piece to be inserted. In the offset field an offset for the current ID
can be entered.
Current uses the current ID.
5. Select the measurement ID from which you want to copy.
6. It is possible to enter an offset to the current ID.
Current uses the current ID.
Select if all corresponding elements are to be copied.
Select if the corresponding work piece coordinate systems are to be copied.
7. Click on OK.

Database
8.7.3 Delete data
This function deletes data from the database.

It is possible to select and delete multiple data records.

3. Select the data record to be deleted.
4. Click on the command button Delete.
8.7.4 Edit data
This function allows you to edit the selected data sets in the database.
It is possible to select multiple data records and edit them one after the other.

3. Select the data record.

Database
4. Click on the command button Edit.
5. Edit the data record.

6. Click on OK.
8.8 Customize View

8.8.1 Print data
This function prints the tree structure of the database.

3. Click on the command button Quick Print.

Database
8.8.2 Split database view
This function allows you to split the database work window into two individual views.
Therewith another system or measurement database than the currently active one can be displayed in the
second view.
Thus data can be copied fast from one database to another.

3. Click on Split view.
In order to load another database than the current one into the second view, one has to click on
the arrow next to the command button Split View and select a measurement or system database
from a directory or the list.
The data can also be copied with drag and drop from one to another database.
8.8.3 Close database window
This function closes the database work window.


Database
3. Click on Close.
8.9 Display data details

This functions displays the details of the individual date records in the lower part of the database work
window.
The function can be activated in the context menu by right clicking in the right side of the database window. It
stays active until it is deactivated again.

CAD Model
9 CAD Model
9.1 Information about the CAD model

Metrosoft QUARTIS works with CAD Models in the ACIS format.
The following versions are supported:
Supported ACIS version in QUARTIS

22
If CAD models of a different format are imported, they will be converted into the ACIS format.
The following CAD formats are supported:
Supported CAD formats in QUARTIS

CATIA V4 4.1x + 4.2x
CATIA V5 R5 - R21
DXF 2000/2002 + R12
IGES - 5.3
INS
Parasolid - 24
ProEnignee 16 - Wildfire5, Creo1.0
r
Siemens - NX8
NX
Solid Edge - v20 + -ST4
SolidWorks 1999 - 2012
STEP AP203 + AP214
VDA 1.0 + 2.0
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 CAD Model 99

CAD Model
9.2 Import (convert) CAD models

This function imports a surface data record (CAD model) into the active work piece.
Thereby the path and file name of the imported model is saved in the database under CAD models.

2. Click on Import.
4. Enter a description for the CAD model.

5. Adjust, if necessary, the converter options for CAD files.
6. Select using Add... additional CAD models.
It is possible to select multiple CAD models at the same time.
All imported CAD models including path and file name are now displayed in the dialog.

CAD Model
7. Adjust the list of CAD models using Modify, Delete and Delete all.
8. Select a model and a function in the contextual menu (right mouse button).
Change color... assigns a new color to the model using the color dialog. When adding a model, the
default color is assigned to it. Auxiliary files have a fixed color.
Standard auxiliary file sets an auxiliary file as standard auxiliary file. Newly added auxiliary
elements (eg curves) are added to this file.
9. Click on OK in order to load the CAD models.
A progress bar is displayed during the loading of CAD models. It is possible to abort long loading
processes within this dialog. CAD models not loaded are marked with a cross in the dialog.

CAD Model
9.3 Save CAD model under a new name

This function saves an imported and altered CAD model under a new name.

2. Click on Save.
4. Enter the new file name for the CAD model, change the data type if needed and save it.
The CAD model can be saved as ACIS® file in binary (*.sab), text (*.sat) or auxiliary file format
(*.sax).

CAD Model
9.4 Change CAD model

This function allows you to alter or exchange an imported CAD model of the active work piece.

2. Click on Import.
4. Select the CAD model to be changed.

5. Click on Modify.

CAD Model
6. Select the corresponding format from the drop down. If you do not know the format, select All CAD
files.
7. Select the corresponding CAD model.
8. Click on Open.
The new CAD file is imported. The path existing in the dialog and the database will be overwritten
with the path of the new CAD model.
9.5 Delete CAD model

This function deletes a CAD model from the active work piece.

2. Click on Import.

CAD Model
4. Select the CAD model to be deleted.

5. Click on Delete.
The path of the CAD model is deleted from the dialog and the database of the active work piece.
9.6 Converter options for CAD files

In this dialog different options for the conversion of CAD files can be set.
Most of these options are used in order to correct erroneous and inaccurate CAD files and make them
useable for the ACIS® Graphics Kernel.

CAD Model
General
Calculate facets
When this switch is enabled a file with facets (*.SAF) for graphic representation of the model is created after
the end of CAD file conversion. If the facet file is present at the time of loading the model, the model will be
displayed faster. Through the submenus Fine/Medium/Rough one can select the display quality for which the
facets should be created.
Save as binary file
When the ACIS® files are saved in binary format (*.SAB), a CAD file is loaded about twice as fast. Thus this
option should always be active. Moreover, it has no effects on the duration of the conversion process. If this
option is not activated, the file is saved in text format (*.SAT). This is reasonable only for the error search or
data exchange between various computer systems.
Save data in downwards compatible format
This switch must be set so that the converted models can also be read and processed in older Metrosoft
QUARTIS versions. Data is then saved in ACIS version 20.
Create local copy of file
This option saves the converted file in the "Common Data" directory instead in the location of the source file.
Adjust data during conversion
If this switch is set, then the CAD data is adjusted to the high precision of ACIS® during the conversion.
Additionally, errors in the structure of the CAD model are corrected.
This option can slow down the conversion considerably.
To accelerate the conversion, you must disable this option. This option applies to the conversion of
CATIAV4, STEP and ProE files.
Repair data subsequently
If this switch is activated, the converted data is then tested, repaired and simplified. This helps avoiding
errors at the time of display or intersection of models. This operation can take a long time.
Select CAD coordinate system
If this option is active, then the names of the coordinate systems included in the CAD model are listed in a
dialog during the import of CAD data.
In this dialog the user can select which coordinate system should be used.
If only one coordinate system is saved in the CAD data, or if the option is switched off, then the dialog is not
displayed.
Convert surface orientation
If this option is active, the orientation of the surface (front- and backside) will be kept during the conversion.
The surface orientation is displayed in the graphics,
Take over assembly group structure
If this option is active, the individual parts (*.PRT, *.CATPart) are converted into individual ACIS files an one
single assembly group file (*.SAG) during the conversion of assemblies in ProE (*.ASM) and CATIA V5
(*.CATProduct) format. During the import of the assembly group file, the corresponding ACIS files are added
to the graphics. The individual parts then can be displayed/hidden in the graphics via the layer management.
The layer structure of the parts remains.
Filter
• Convert trimmed surfaces
• Convert free surfaces
• Convert free curves

CAD Model
• Convert free points

• Convert PMI
This option allows you to switch on or off the translation of the corresponding elements.
Free surfaces are the surfaces that are not bordered by trimming curves. Free curves and free points are
curves/edges or points that are not part of any surface.
These switches enable excluding unnecessary elements from the conversion and reducing the size of the
model file.
Convert PMI
With this option, the metrological relevant PMI (Product Manufacturing Information) data contained in CATIA
V5 models is converted and directly displayed in the 3D graphics. This information (dimensioning with
tolerances and general drawing notes) is placed as CAD objects (lines and text) on their own layer. The layer
names correspond with the defined views in the CATIA V5 model.
This PMI information is displayed as graphic elements. In order to be able to identify the tolerances
and references assigned to the surfaces and geometry elements, a viewer that displays the
relations of the references, tolerances and CAD elements has to be used.
Definitions file for user format

Select here the file where the definition of the user format is saved.
The structure of such a definition file is described under User format converter.
Standard
The options for the conversion of CAD files are set back to their default values.
OK
The set conversion options are taken over.

CAD Model
9.7 Converter
9.7.1 ACIS Converter
Metrosoft QUARTIS uses the ACIS format from Spatial. Data in this format can be imported without
conversion.
The converter supports ACIS version 22.
9.7.2 CATIA V4 Converter
The CATIAV4 converter converts CATIAV4 CAD files to the ACIS format used by QUARTIS.
The converter supports CATIAV4 versions 4.1.x and 4.2.x.

The CATIAV4 data can be in model (*.model) or export format (*.exp).
The following table shows the CATIAV4 elements that are translated by the CATIAV4 converter.
CATIA V4 element ACIS Element

Coordinate system WCS *
Color Color
Layer Group (Layer)
Line Line
Circle Circle
Conic Bspline
Polynomial curve Bspline
NURBS Bspline
Plane Plane
Cylinder Cone
Cone Cone
Torus Torus
Sphere Ellipsoid
Polynomial surface Bspline
* (model is transformed into selected coordinate system)

CAD Model
9.7.3 CATIA V5 Converter
The CATIAV5 converter converts CATIAV5 CAD files to the ACIS format used by QUARTIS.
The converter supports CATIAV5 versions R5 to R21.

The CATIAV5 data can be in single model (*.catpart) or assembly group (*.catproduct) format.
The following table shows the CATIAV5 elements that are translated by the CATIAV5 converter.
CATIA V5 Element ACIS Element

FeatureDimension&Tolerancing -
Color Color
Layer Group (Layer)
Line Line
Circle Circle
NURBS Bspline
Plane Plane
Cylinder Cone
Cone Cone
Torus Torus
Sphere Ellipsoid

CAD Model
9.7.4 DXF Converter
The DXF converter converts DXF CAD files to the ACIS format used by QUARTIS.
Only 2D elements are supported.
The converter supports the versions DXF 2000/2002 (AC1015) and DXF R12 (AC1009) and
compatible.
The following table shows the DXF elements that are translated by the DXF converter.
DXF Element ACIS Element

Color Color
Layer Group (Layer)
Point Point
Line Line
Circle Circle
Arc Circle
Plane Plane
Plane Plane
Ellipse EllipseCone
Polyline Lines and Circles
Spline Bspline

CAD Model
9.7.5 IGES Converter
The IGES converter converts IGES CAD files to the ACIS format used by QUARTIS.
The converter only supports IGES files until version 5.3.
The following table shows the IGES elements that are translated by the IGES converter.
IGES Element Form ACIS Element

level group (layer)
color color
#100 Circular Arc ellipse
#102 Composite Curve curves
#104 Conic Arc : Ellipse ellipse
#106 1 Copious Data : 2D Points points
#106 2 Copious Data : 2D Points points
#106 3 Copious Data : 2D Points points with vector attribute
#106 11 Copious Data : 2D Points straights
#106 12 Copious Data : 2D Points straights
#108 1 Plane Entity : Bounded plane
#110 Line straight
#112 Parametric Spline Curve intcurve
#114 Parametric Spline Surface spline
#116 Point point
#118 Ruled Surface spline
#120 Surface of Revolution spline
#122 Tabulated Cylinder spline
#124 Transformation *
#126 Rational B-Spline Curve intcurve

#128 Rational B-Spline Surface spline
#130 Offset Curve curve
#140 Offset Surface spline
#143 Bounded Surface face
#144 Trimmed Surface face
#190 Plane Surface face

CAD Model
#192 Right Circular Cylindrical Surface face

#194 Right Circular Conical Surface face
#196 Spherical Surface face
#198 Toroidal Surface face
#308 Subfigure entities
#314 Color definition color
#402 Group entities
#408 Group entities
#410 View entities
#514 Shell entities
9.7.6 INS Converter
The INS converter converts inspection plan files in the INS-format which have been exported from Audiplan
(CATIA V4) to the ACIS format used by QUARTIS.
Thereby auxiliary elements are created which later can be selected in the graphics in order to measure
elements.

CAD Model
9.7.7 Parasolid Converter
The Parasolid converter converts elements from the Parasolid CAD files to the ACIS format used by
QUARTIS.
The converter supports Parasolid files up to version 24.
The following table shows the Parasolid elements that are translated by the Parasolid converter.
Parasolid Element ACIS Element

Coordinate system wcs *
Color Color
Layer Group (Layer)
Point Point
Curve Curve
Cylinder Cone
Sphere Sphere
Torus Torus
Spline Surface (NURBS) Spline
Revolution Surface Spline
Blend Surface Spline
Cone Cone
Offset Surface Spline
Swept Surface Spline

CAD Model
9.7.8 ProEngineer Converter
The ProEngineer converter converts ProEngineer CAD files to the ACIS format used by QUARTIS.
The converter supports the ProEngineer versions 16 to Wildfire 5 and Creo1.0, whereby
compressed and encoded ProEngineer files are also accepted.
Also assembly groups in the *asm format can be converted.
The following table shows the ProEngineer elements that are translated by the ProEngineer converter.
ProEngineer Element ACIS Element

Color Color
Layer Group (Layer)
Line Line
Arc Ellipse
Polynomial Curve Bspline
Bspline Polynomial Curve Bspline
NURBS curve Bspline
Plane Plane
Cylinder Cone
Cone Cone
Torus Torus
Degenerated Torus Sphere
Tabulated Cylinder Sweep surface
Polynomial Surface Bspline
Bspline Polynomial Surface Bspline
Ruled Surface Bspline
Surface of revolution Surface of revolution
Fillet Surface Bspline
Cylindrical Spline Bspline
NURBS Surface Bspline

CAD Model
9.7.9 Siemens NX Converter
The Siemens NX converter converts elements from Siemens NX CAD files to the ACIS format used by
QUARTIS.
The converter supports Siemens NX files up to version NX8.

The Siemens NX data can be in single model (*.x_t) or assembly group format (*x_b).
The following table shows the Siemens NX elements that are translated by the Siemens NX converter.
Siemens NX Element ACIS Element

Color Color
Layer Group (Layer)
Point Point
Curve Curve
Cylinder Cone
Sphere Sphere
Torus Torus
Cone Cone

CAD Model
9.7.10 Solid Edge Converter
The Solid Edge converter converts elements from Solid Edge CAD files to the ACIS format used by
QUARTIS.
The converter supports Solid Edge files up to version v20 and ST4.
The Solid Edge data can in single model (*.par, *.psm) or assembly group format (*.asm).
The following table shows the Solid Edge elements that are translated by the Solid Edge converter.
Solid Edge Element ACIS Element

Color Color
Point Point
Curve Curve
Cylinder Cone
Sphere Sphere
Torus Torus
Cone Cone

CAD Model
9.7.11 SolidWorks Converter
The SolidWorks converter converts SolidWorks CAD files to the ACIS format used by CM.
The converter supports SolidWorks files from version 1999 to 2012.

The SolidWorks data can in single model (*.sldprt) or assembly group format (*.sldasm).
The following table shows the SolidWorks elements that are translated by the SolidWorks converter.
Solid Works Element ACIS Element
Color Color
Point Point
Curve Curve
Cylinder Cone
Sphere Sphere
Torus Torus
Cone Cone

CAD Model
9.7.12 STEP Converter
The STEP converter converts STEP CAD files to the ACIS format used by QUARTIS.
The converter supports the STEP format AP203 and AP214.
The following table shows the STEP elements that are translated by the STEP converter.
STEP Element ACIS Element

COLOR COLOR ATTRIBUTE
LAYER GROUP (Layer)
MANIFOLD_SOLID_BREP BODY
CLOSED_SHELL SHELL
ADVANCED_FACE FACE
EDGE_LOOP LOOP
ORIENTED_EDGE COEDGE
EDGE_CURVE EDGE
VERTEX VERTEX
LINESTEP STRAIGHT
CIRCLE ELLIPSE
ELLIPSE ELLIPSE
PLANE PLANE
CYLINDRICAL_SURFACE CONE
CONICAL_SURFACE CONE
SPHERICAL_SURFACE SPHERE
TOROIDAL_SURFACE TORUS
UNIFORM_CURVE exact_int_cur
QUASI_UNIFORM_CURVE exact_int_cur
B_SPLINE_CURVE_WITH_KNOTS exact_int_cur
BEZIER_CURVE exact_int_cur
NURBS exact_int_cur
OFFSET_SURFACE exact_int_cur
PCURVE pcurve
all other curve types int_int_cur

CAD Model
UNIFORM_SURFACE exact_int_sur
QUASI_UNIFORM_SURFACE exact_int_sur
B_SPLINE_SURFACE_WITH_KNOTS exact_int_sur
BEZIER_SURFACE exact_int_sur
NURBS exact_int_sur
OFFSET_SURFACE offset_spl_sur
SURFACE_OF_REVOLUTION rot_spl_sur
SURFACE_OF_LINEAR_EXTRUSION sweep_spl_sur
9.7.13 VDA Converter
The VDA-FS converter converts VDA-FS CAD files to the ACIS format used by QUARTIS.
The converter supports VDA-FS versions 1.0 and 2.0.
The following table shows the VDA elements that are translated by the VDA converter.
VDA Element ACIS Element

Point POINT point
Point Sequence PSET point
Point vector sequence MDI point with vector attribute
Circle / Circular Arc CIRCLE ellipse
Curve CURVE intcurve
Surface SURF spline
Bounded Surface FACE face
Group GROUP group (layer)
Transformation Matrix TMAT wcs *

CAD Model
9.7.14 User format Converter
The user format converter converts the geometry and measuring information from a text file (ASCII) to an
ACIS format used by QUARTIS. Thereby auxiliary elements are created which can be clicked on for the
element measurement in the graphics.
The elements contained in the text file must be marked using unique identifiers.
The structure of the user forma of the text file is defined in a definition file (*.INI).
The definition file used for the conversion can be selected using the function Converter options for CAD files.
As a default, the CustomFormat.ini in the work directory settings (Settings) of Metrosoft QUARTIS is used.
This file is also an example for the structure of a definition file.
The definition file has a structure similar to that of a Window initialization file. It is divided into two sections -
"Definitions" and "Elements".
The section "Definitions" defines the following settings:
Key Setting
InputExtension File extension of the user file
WriteSax File extension for the generated ACIS file:
0 for SAT or 1 for SAX
KeyDelimiters Separator between the elements
(line break \n, tab \t)
ParamDelimiters Separator between the parameters of an element
(line break \n, tabulator \t)
The section Elements defines the elements contained in the user format and its parameters. The definitions
for each element are presented in a row as follows:
Key = identifier, Parameter1, Parameter2, …
The following table lists the elements, their key names and parameter that are supported by the user format
converter.
Geometry Key Fixed parameter Optional parameter

Point Point posX, posY, posZ dirX, dirY, dirZ, name, matthick,
tol, layer, color
Edgepoint Edgepoint posX, posY, posZ, type, diam, name, matthick, tol,
dirX, dirY, dirZ, layer, color
orientX, orientY, orientZ
Circle Circle posX, posY, posZ, name, matthick, tol, layer, color
dirX, dirY, dirZ, diam
Rectangle Rectangle posX, posY, posZ, name, matthick, tol, layer, color
dirX, dirY, dirZ,
width, length

CAD Model
Longhole Longhole posX, posY, posZ, name, matthick, tol, layer, color
dirX, dirY, dirZ,
width, length
Longhole Slot posX, posY, posZ, name, matthick, tol, layer, color
dirX, dirY, dirZ,
width, length, type,
Sphere Sphere posX, posY, posZ, name, matthick, tol, layer, color
radius
Cylinder Cylinder posX, posY, posZ, name, matthick, tol, layer, color
dirX, dirY, dirZ,
radius, length
Geometry
Reference point Reference posX, posY, posZ dirX, dirY, dirZ, name,
matthick, tol, layer, color
Reference Tolerance name, lowTol, uppTol
Linked tolerance TolLink tol, refList
The following points should be taken into account while defining elements:
• The identifier must correspond to the identifier used in the user format and should be listed as the
first parameter.
• The sequence of parameters should correspond to that in the user format.
• Parameters that are not separated by separators but have a fixed length must be terminated with a
% and the number of characters: e.g. …, Parameter%10, …
• If the user format contains parameters that are to be skipped, a "dummy" parameter must be
inserted at the desired position.
The table given below describes all the possible parameters and their contents. All measurements must be
expressed in millimeters.
Parameter Description Content

dummy text to be skipped Text
name Name Text
tol Name of the used tolerance element Text
matthick Material thickness Number
layer Layer number Integer
color Color coded from 1 to 8 (black, red, green, blue, yellow, Number
magenta, cyan, white)

CAD Model
posX Position in X Number

posY Position in Y Number
posZ Position in Z Number
dirX Direction in X Number
dirY Direction in Y Number
dirZ Direction in Z Number
orientX Reference direction or orientation in X Number
orientY Reference direction or orientation in Y Number
orientZ Reference direction or orientation in Z Number
type Edge point: Flanged edge or right-angled edge ROUND or FLAT
Slot: Long hole or rectangle
width Width Number
length Length Number
Slot: Length without semi-circle in case of long hole
diam Diameter Number
Edge point: Material thickness in direction of edge
radius Radius Number
lowTol Lower vector tolerance Number
uppTol Upper vector tolerance Number
refList List of element names separated through parameter delimiters Text

Program
10 Program
10.1 Information about the program

Individual steps of the measurement process can be saved in a program.
This measurement process can then be used again by executing the saved program.
Two different types of programs can be created and executed with Metrosoft QUARTIS:
QUARTIS programs (. QrtProg)

QUARTIS programs can only be created and executed with Metrosoft QUARTIS. The program is recorded
using Teach-In.
DMIS programs (. Dmi)

The DMIS standard (Dimensional Measuring Interface Specification) has established itself in the area of
technology transfer.
The DMIS standard defines the data format for transmitting measurement instructions from a CAD / CAM
system to a coordinate measuring machine or between different coordinate measuring machines.
A DMIS file contains, besides the geometrical data, all required technology data relating to the measurement
process. Thus representing a complete measuring program. This way measuring programs can be created
independently from the later used measuring machine, either machine remotely on a CAD system or using a
software with built-in measuring machine simulation.
QUARTIS supports DMIS version 5.2.
10.2 Create new program

This function creates a new program in the currently active work piece.

2. Click on New.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Program 123

Program
4. Enter a program ID and select if you want to create a QUARTIS or DMIS program. A new, empty
program is created by clicking on Finish.
5. If you click on Next, an extended selection is available:
6. Select if you want to start with an empty program, a template, a copy or the mirroring of an already
existing program.
Hints for the option Start with mirroring of existing program.
A new program is created by clicking on Finish.
7. If you click on Next, another extended selection is available:
Steps 7 - 9 are not available for DMIS programs.

Program
8. Define properties and corresponding values as needed.

9. Click on Finish.
10.3 Mirror program
This function is only available for Metrosoft QUARTIS programs.
The measurement tasks are usually identical for symmetrical work pieces (e.g. left and right vehicle parts),
however the coordinate values are mirrored. This function allows mirroring a work piece program (e.g. left
fender) in its counterpart (e.g. right fender).
When mirroring programs, one has to proceed the same way a new program is created. In step 2 the option
described below has to be selected.
1. Select the option Start with mirroring of existing program.

2. Select the program to be mirrored.

Program
Only programs from the current work piece can be mirrored. If another program is to be mirrored, it
first has to be copied into the current work piece.
3. Select the mirroring plane on which the program is to be mirrored.

4. With a click on Finish, the new (mirrored) program is created.
Features are always mirrored. Absolute values (e.g. size or roundness) remain unchanged.
Only one coordinate system (the one that defines the mirroring plane) can be active in the program
to be mirrored.
Example mirroring on YZ plane (y-axis)
Before mirroring After mirroring
Description X Y LTol UTol Description X Y LTol UTol
Point A 40 10 - 0.1 0.2 Point A’ - 40 10 - 0.2 0.1
Before mirroring After mirroring
Description LTol UTol Description LTol UTol
2D angle C 30° - 1° + 2° 2D angle C’ 150° - 2° + 1°
Probe systems have to be adjusted manually.

When creating programs to be mirrored, ensure that the least probe systems and simplest possible
stylus arrangements are used. This makes the automatic mirroring of programs considerably easier
and more comprehensible/clearer.

Program
10.4 Open program

This function opens and activates an existing program from the active work piece.

2. Click on Open.
4. Select the desired program from the list.

5. Click on OK.

Program
10.5 Save active program

This function saves the active program into the database.

2. Click on Save.
4. The current program is saved into the database.
A QUARTIS program is always automatically saved into the database whenever the record or edit
mode is terminated.

Program
10.6 Import or link programs

This functions imports a program which is available as *.QrtProg or *.dmi file into the current active work
piece. It is also possible to link the program to the work piece.

2. Click on Import.
4. Select the desired program and click on Open. It is possible to select multiple programs at the same
time.
5. Select the program type.
Only QUARTIS (*.QrtProg) or DMIS (*.dmi) programs can be imported or linked.

Program
6. With Add... further programs can be added to the import list.

7. In order to link the selected program with the work piece, check the checkbox Link. Else the
programs will be imported into the database.
If the program is linked, only file name and path are saved as a link into the database.
8. With the checkbox Link all one can determine if all programs from the list are to be linked or
imported.
9. Click on Import / Link.
Green indicates that the import or the linkage was successful.

Red indicates that an error occurred during the import / linkage.
10. Click on Close.

Program
10.7 Export programs

This function exports existing programs from the active work piece.
Exported QUARTIS programs are encoded into the QUARTIS internal format.

2. Click on Export.
4. Select the desired program. It is possible to select multiple programs at the same time.
5. Click on OK.

Program
6. Click on Export file....

If needed, change storage location and file name in the dialog that opens.
It is possible to add more program from the current work piece to the export dialog by clicking on
Add....
7. Click on Export.
The programs from the list are exported.
8. Click on Close.
10.8 Display, edit and execute programs

This function displays the Program window in the workspace.

Program

4. The Program window is displayed in the workspace.
10.9 Execute program

10.9.1 Check program
This function is only available for DMIS programs.
This function checks the current DMIS program.
1. Activate the work window Program.

2. Activate the contextual tab Program.
3. Click on the command button Check.

Program
4. The result of the checking process is displayed in the message window. By double clicking on a
displayed error or warning, the corresponding line of the program is displayed.
When executing programs an automatic check is conducted.
Program texts are displayed in different colors within the DMIS editor:
Comments: Grey
Executable keywords (MAJOR WORDs): Dark blue
Executable keywords (MINOR WORDs): Blue
Skipped keywords (MAJOR WORDs), this means commands, that neither result in an action nor a
syntax error in QUARTIS: Purple
Texts: Marron
Numbers: Green
10.9.2 Execute program in new measurement
This function starts the program in a new measurement.

This means that the measurement number is increased by 1 as long as elements are already available in the
current measurement.

3. Activate the function Program execution in new measurement.

4. Click on the command button Execute.
The program is executed in a new measurement.
10.9.3 Execute program with parameter modification
This function executes a program with parameter modification.

This can take place in a new measurement or in the current measurement.

Program
The program is executed step by step. The user can change and confirm the parameter of the corresponding
function before the program sentence is executed.
The altered parameters are automatically saved into the program.

3. Activate the function Program execution with parameter modification.

The program is executed with parameter modification.
10.9.4 Execute program in current measurement
This function executes the program in the current measurement.

This means that the current measurement is overwritten.

3. Deactivate the function Program execution in new measurement if it is active.

The program is executed in a new measurement.

Program
10.9.5 Execute program in single step mode
This function executes the program in single steps.

The new program sentence is executed by clicking on the command button.
After the execution the program is again in pause mode until the next click on the command button is carried
out.

3. Click on the command button Single step.

The program sentenced marked in red is executed with the next click on Single Step.
The program can be further executed in regular mode (not single step) by clicking on the
command button Continue.
10.9.6 Pause program
This function halts the execution of the program and sets it into pause mode.
This function is only active when the program is in execution mode.

3. Click on the command button Pause.

Program
The program is also halted if the command button in the status window is clicked.
The pause mode can be terminated with a click on Continue and the program is executed from
the position it was halted.
10.9.7 Stop program
This function stops the execution of the program or terminates the record / edit mode.

3. Click on the command button Stop.
The execution of the program can also be stopped when the program is in pause mode and the
pause button is clicked in the status window.
The recording / editing mode can also be terminated using the corresponding command button in
the status window.
10.9.8 Record program
This function activates the recording mode.

In this mode all work steps are recorded into the program.

Program
3. Click on the command button Record.
The recording mode can also be activated in the program window using the right mouse button.
It can be terminated as follows:
• Click on Stop
• Click on the command button in the status window
• Using the right mouse button in the program window and select Stop.
Delete backwards
This function irrevocably deletes the program sentence above the red insertion line.
1. Select the desired program line.

2. Click on Delete backwards in the context menu (right mouse button).

Program
Set insertion point
This function defines a position within a program on which the next program sentences will be inserted from.
This function is only available when the recording mode is active.
1. If necessary, set the insertion point on the right position.

2. Click on Set insertion point in the context menu (right mouse button).

Program
10.9.9 Edit program
These functions allow editing program sentences.

QUARTIS Program DMIS Program
3. Select the desired function.

Depending on if a QUARTIS or a DMIS program is displayed in the work window, different editing
functions are available.
Edit program
Cut*
This function cuts the selected program sentences and saves them into the clipboard.
Copy
This function copies the selected program sentences into the clipboard.
Parallel to the binary data, all selected lines are also copied in ASCII text format into the
clipboard. Thus allowing to use them in any editor, e.g. Notepad, as text.
Insert*
This function inserts either inserts QUARTIS program sentences from the clipboard into the
QUARTIS program or text from the clipboard into a DMIS program.
The content of the clipboard is available until other program sentences are copied into the
clipboard or Metrosoft QUARTIS is terminated.
Delete*
This function deletes the selected program sentences. In QUARTIS programs, the program
sentences are irrevocably deleted.
Go to program line or marker
This function positions the cursors at a certain line number or any marker. In DMIS programs one
can only jump ti line numbers.
Edit defaults
This function displays and automatically selects the current program line. This function is only

Program
available in pause mode.

Find
This function displays a search dialog that allows you to search for any text within the DMIS
program.
Find and replace
This function displays a dialog that allows you to search for any text and replace it another text
within the DMIS program.
Undo
This function revokes the last changes executed within a DMIS program.
Redo
This function revokes the carried out change by the UNDO function.
*Before using editing functions for QUARTIS programs, the editing mode has to be activated. This is an additional security measure to
ensure that programs are not changed by accident.
In editing mode it is also possible to edit an individual program sentence by double clicking on it or to activate/deactivate program
sentences
The functions Cut, Copy, Insert and Delete can also be executed in the program window using
the right mouse button.
Activate edit mode
This function activates the editing mode.

If the editing mode is active, program sentences can be edited/changed without having to execute the
program with parameter modification.
The altered values are automatically written into the program.


Program
4. The values of a program sentence can be changed by double clicking on it.
The editing mode can also be activated using the right mouse button in the program window.
It can be terminated as follows:
• Click on Stop
• In the status window click on the command button
• Select Stop using the right mouse button in the program window.
Deactivate/activate program sentences
This function activates or deactivates program sentences in a program.

Deactivated sentences are not included in the program process. This means the corresponding function is
not executed.
The first three steps are not available for DMIS programs as the editing mode is always active.


Program
4. Select the program sentences that are to be activated or deactivated.

5. Click on Deactivate/Activate in the context menu (right mouse button).
In DMIS program, $$ is written in the beginning of deactivated program lines. Wgen activating
these lines again, the $$ will be removed.
10.9.10 Execute selection
This function executes a selected part of a program.


Program
3. Select the line(s) and open the context menu with a right click.
4. Click on the entry Execute selection.
A start mark is set on the first selected line and end mark is set on the last selected line in the
program.
In the dialog select if you want to measure in CNC on or CNC off mode and then click on OK.
This function is not available if the function Program execution in new measurement is active.
10.9.11 Execute from cursor
This function executes a program from the line in which the cursor is currently located to the end of the
program.
The program is always executed in the current measurement!

3. Select the desired line and open the context menu with a right click.
4. Click on the entry Execute from cursor.
A start mark ( ) is set in the current line.

In the dialog select if you want to measure in CNC on or CNC off mode and then click on OK.

Program
10.9.12 Execute to cursor
The program is executed from program start or a defined start position till the current row, i.e. till the row in
which the cursor is currently located.
The program is always run in the current measurement!

3. Select the desired line and open the context menu with a right click.
4. Click on the entry Execute to cursor.
A stop mark ( ) is set in the current line. .

Program
10.9.13 Set execution position
This function sets a new execution point from which the program can be executed.
This function is only available when the pause mode is active.
1. Select the line where the execution point is to be set and open the context menu with a right click.
2. Click on the entry Set execution point.
3. Click on Continue.
The program is executed from the new position.
10.10 Use program functions
These functions are only available for Metrosoft QUARTIS programs.
10.10.1 CNC mode on/off
This function activates / deactivates the CNC mode

If CNC mode is activated, all following motion commands in the program are automatically executed by the
controller.
If the CNC mode is deactivated, the machine is moved manually using the joystick.
To prevent collisions the CNC mode is automatically deactivated when a program is created.

Program

3. Click on the command button CNC on.
In order to deactivate the CNC mode the command button CNC on has to be clicked once again.
10.10.2 Insert intermediate point
This function inserts an intermediate point with the coordinates of the current probe position into the
program.
This function is used by CNC controlled measuring system in order to control the motion paths of
the coordinates measuring device during the automatic program execution and to avoid collisions.

3. Click on the command button Intermediate Point.

Program
10.10.3 Insert dialog
This function inserts a user dialog into the program.

This dialog is displayed during the execution of the program. The program is halted until the user confirms
the dialog.
With the help of this function the user is provided with some important recommendations (for
instance which probe to set up or how to probe the next element).
Upon creation of a CNC program it should be considered that here the program execution stops.

3. Click on the command button Dialog.
4. Enter the dialog text.

5. The font can be adjusted if needed.
6. Preview displays the dialog as it will be displayed during the execution of the program.
7. Click on OK.
The dialog is inserted into the program.

Program
10.10.4 Insert image, sound or video
This function inserts pictures, sounds or videos into the program. Those are displayed (picture) or executed
(sound, video) during the program execution.
The following file types are supported: *.bmp, *.gif, *.ico, *.jpg, *.jpeg, *.wmf, *.png, *.wma, *.mid,
*.mp3, *.mi, *.wav, *.avi, *.wmv, *.mpeg, *.mpg.

3. Click on the command button Media.
4. Select the file to be inserted.

Preview displays the file as it will be displayed during the execution of the program.
5. Select the display size in %.
6. Define the display time if needed.
The program will automatically proceed after the display time has elapsed. If no display time is
selected, the dialog has to be confirmed with OK in order for the program to proceed.
Define if the file is to be displayed in full screen and if a background color should be applied. If the
function Full screen is disabled, the media is displayed in a dialog.

Program
7. Set if the program continues (program does not stop during the display of the file) and if an acoustic signal
is played before the media is displayed.
8. Click on OK.
The file is inserted into the program.
10.10.5 Insert comment
This function inserts a comment into the program.

This function enables the programmer to insert some explanatory comments in his program
Comment lines are ignored during the execution and a program will not be halted.
Explanatory comments can be given to the user with help of this function. The insertion of
comment lines makes a program clearer so that it can be quicker adapted to new requirements.

3. Click on the command button Comment.
4. Enter a comment.
5. Click on OK.
The comment is inserted into the program.

Program
10.10.6 Insert marker
This function inserts a marker into the program.

Markers can for example be used for calling a subprogram.

3. Click on the command button Marker.
4. Enter a description.
5. Already existing markers within the current program are displayed and cannot be inserted twice.
6. Click on OK.
The marker is inserted into the program.

Program
10.10.7 Call subprogram
This function calls another program (B) as a subprogram from a program (A).
It is also possible to run only specified subprogram segments (from marker ...to marker).
The execution of program A is halted. The specified sentences from program B are executed.
Program A proceeds from the position it was halted.

3. Click on the command button Subprogram.
4. Enter the name of the program or select the desired program in the drop-down menu ( ) or
selection dialog ( ).
Only already existing subprograms can be called. This requires a careful programming planning.
Eventually the subprogram to be called should be inserted into the PIP in a second step.
5. Select if the complete subprogram or only a part of it is to be executed.
If only a part of the subprogram is to be executed, one has to first set the corresponding markers
within the program.

Program
6. Click on OK.
The call of the subprogram is inserted into the program.
10.10.8 Insert program loop
This function inserts a loop into the program.

This loop is a single loop which repeatedly executes a certain range within a program.

3. Click on the command button Loop.
4. Enter the desired loop index (this variable is set to the start value when the loop is executed and increased
with the step width each further run through).
The loop index can be used as a variable for the ID of measuring elements and references within
a loop.
5. Enter the start value (this value indicates the value of loop index with the first run).

Program
6. Enter the end value (the loop is cancelled as soon as the loop index has exceeded this value).
7. Enter the step width (this value indicates by how much the loop index is increased after one run).
8. Click on OK.
10.10.9 Increase current measurement number by one
This function increases the measurement number by 1. All following commands are executed in a new
measurement. This is especially helpful if several parts are measured in one loop program.
It has to be considered that a loaded work piece coordinate system will not be available in the new
measurement and has to be created again first.

3. Click on the command button Increase Measurement.
10.11 Change and print view

10.11.1 Activate/deactivate split program view
This function splits the program window into 2 views.

Program
3. Click on the command button Split View.
10.11.2 Print program
This function prints the active program in the program window on the standard printer.

3. Click on the command button Quick Print.
10.11.3 Close program window
This function closes the program window.

3. Click on the command button Close.

Program
10.12 Display program sentence details
This function displays detailed information about the individual program sentences.

3. Click on Details in the context menu (right mouse button).

Details can either be displayed right of the program or below it.
10.13 Set/delete breakpoint

This function sets/deletes breakpoints within a program.
The program halts and is set into pause mode as soon as such a breakpoint is reached during the execution.
The program proceeds as soon as Continue is clicked or can be executed in single step mode by clicking on
Single Step.


Program
3. Click with the right mouse button on the line number where you want to insert a breakpoint.
Click on Delete in the context menu (right mouse button).
It is possible to set several breakpoints in a program.

In order to delete all breakpoints, select Delete all break points in the context menu.

Machine
11 Machine
11.1 Information about the machine

Functions directly related to the machine are available under Machine.
The machine components such as controller, probe system, joystick and temperature sensors have to be
configured in the Metrosoft QUARTIS configuration program.
The following machines are supported:
Machines
WPZ50, WPZ100, WPC2030, WPC2040, WENZEL Pointmaster,

WENZEL exaCT Analysis, I++DME Server
11.2 Adjust machine settings

11.2.1 Change measuring-/search-/retraction distance
The measuring distance defines the distance between the work piece surface and the lead point. From the
lead point the positioning speed is switched to the measuring speed and the probe is activated for the probe
point measurement.
The search distance defines the maximal distance which the machine travels further when a probe point is
expected in order to find it. If within this distance no probe contact takes place, the message "No point found"
is displayed and the probe moves back to the lead point.
The retraction distance defines the distance which the probe will retract after measuring the probe point.
1. Click on the ribbon tab Machine.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Machine 158

Machine
3. Adjust the Measuring/Search/Retraction distance (depending on the global length measurements in mm or

inch).
How to change the global length measurements>>
4. Click on OK.
The retraction distance is disabled as long as the checkbox next to it is not activated and the
probe will move back to the lead point.
With the inside elements circle, cylinder, sphere, rectangle and slot, the measuring and retraction
distance is automatically reduced in case it has been defined too large.

Machine
11.2.2 Change positioning speed and acceleration

The positioning speed defines how fast the machine is moving outside of measuring sequences.
The positioning acceleration defines how fast the machine accelerates to the positioning speed.
3. Adjust the positioning speed and acceleration (in % of the maximal possible speed/acceleration of the
machine).
4. Click on OK.

Machine
11.2.3 Change measuring speed and acceleration

The measuring speed defines how fast the machine moves within measuring sequences.
The measuring acceleration defines how fast the machine accelerates to the measuring speed.
3. Adjust the measuring speed and acceleration (in % of the maximal possible measuring speed and
acceleration of the machine) an.
4. Click on OK.

Machine
11.2.4 Change articulating probing system settings
With a PH20 articulating probing system one can select if probe points are to be measure using head
probing or not.
3. Without head probing

If the checkbox is not selected, the probe points are approached by traversing in the three machine
axes X, Y and Z. A and B angle of the articulating probing system remain unchanged.
With head probing

If the checkbox is selected, probe points are measured by rotating and swiveling the articulating
probing system. The advantage in doing so is, that only the articulating probing system is moved and
not the entire machine, which reduces the vibrations. Thus it is possible to measure with higher
measuring speed and acceleration.
Min. probing angle and Max. probing angle

Machine
These settings allow limiting the probing angle α to the bottom and top. The probing angle α
describes the angle between the work piece surface and the stylus direction.
1 = Work piece, 2 = Max. probing angle, 3 = Min. probing angle
In order to avoid grinding probing, the max. probing angle is limited to 70°.
With a plane, for example, one can avoid with the min. probing angle that the probe head touches
the plane to be measured.
The limitation angles do not have an influence on the effective probing angle α with all
element types:
Element Effective probing angle α
Plane, Line, Surface, Point, Edge point, Inside - α is larger than the min. probing angle
slot, Inside rectangle, Inside sphere, Outside
- α is smaller than the max. probing angle
sphere, Outside cone
Inside circle, Inside cylinder, Inside cone - α is smaller than the max. probing angle
Min. probing angle has no influence on
measurement.
(Effective probing angle can go towards 0° , see
example inside circle)
Outside circle, Outside cylinder, Outside slot, - α corresponds with the min. probing angle
Outside rectangle, Curve
Max. probing angle has no influence on the
measurement.
Example inside circle:

If the quill can be positioned in the bore axis and the probing angle α does not exceed the max.
probing angle, all probe points are measured with the A and B axes of the PH20 without movement
in the X, Y and Z axis.
α ≤ max. probing angle

Machine
With large bores, the quill is positioned in X and Y in such a way, that the probing angle α equals the
defined max. probing angle. This prevents grinding probing or probing that does not reach the
material anymore.
α = max. probing angle
4. Click on OK.
11.2.5 Change scanning speed

The scanning speed is entered in [mm/s] or [Inch/s].
3. Change the scanning speed and acceleration.

Select if the measurement is to executed with known or unknown scan path:
known: With this method known (calculated from nominal values, distribution methods and distribution
parameter) scan paths are measured. This method is selected when the assembly deviations to be
expected are small (within the probe deviation).

Machine
Advantage
It is possible to measure with a high scanning speed (depending on the assembly)
Disadvantage
In the case of too large assembly deviations (larger than the probe deviation) an excessive deviation of
the probe system can occur or the probe loses contact to the assembly.
unknown: With this method only start and end points as well as scan directions are calculated out of
the nominal values, distribution methods and distribution parameter. The probe does not follow a
specified scan path but moves along the assembly outline. This method is selected when the
assembly deviations to be expected are large (larger than probe deviation).
Advantage
It is possible to measure assemblies with large deviations (larger than probe deviation).
Disadvantage
The scanning speed has to be reduced (depending on assembly).
4. Click on OK.
When executing a program, an element can be measured with known or unknown scan paths. It
does not matter how this element had been measured while recording the program
11.3 Change joystick direction

The joystick direction can be set in 3 different ways.
It can be moved in the machine coordinate system, the current coordinate system or in element direction.
2. Click on the command button Joystick.

Machine
3. Select the joystick direction by clicking on the corresponding symbol.

4. Click on OK.
If the switch Automatic update when changing coordinate system is set, the joystick direction
is automatically adjusted after each coordinate system change.
With Move in element direction the joystick direction is adjusted to the largest component (X. Y
or Z) of the direction vector of the selected element.
11.4 Move machine to origin

This function moves a CNC-controlled machine automatically to the origin marks of the scale (initialize).
This is mandatory after the controller has been restarted.
2. Click on the command button Origin.

Machine
3. Check the motion path and the position of the articulating probing system. Then click on Move
machine to origin.
A dialog is displayed during the initialization, which provides information about the order and
actual state of the initialization sequence.
The displayed colors have the following meaning

Visualization
The axis cannot be initialized at the moment (is used on measuring machines with a
Red waiting
prescribed order of initialization)
Yellow ready The axis is ready to be initialized
Green done The axis is initialized
11.5 Activate/deactivate axis drives

The machine can be moved manually by disengaging the axis drives.
This can helpful for scribing a work piece for example.
In order to be available, this function has to be enabled in the Metrosoft QUARTIS configuration
program. The function can only be activated for machines, which are suitable for it.
Switch off axis drives
2. Click on the command button Drives.

Machine
3. Activate the option Scribe.

4. Click on OK.
Switch on axis drives
2. Click on the command button Drives.
3. Click on OK.

Machine
11.6 Position machine

This function positions the machine either absolutely or relatively in work piece or machine coordinates.
2. Click on the command button Position.
3. Select relative (stylus is shifted by the specified X, Y and Z values relative from the current position) or
absolute (stylus is shifted to the specified position absolute from the origin of the selected coordinate system).
4. Select PCS (the relative movement or the absolute positioning respectively refer to the current part coordinate
system) or MCS (the relative movement or the absolute positioning respectively refer to the machine
coordinate system).
5. Enter the X, Y and Z values.
Individual axes can be locked using the corresponding checkbox.
6. If a PH20 or REVO (with RSP2) articulating probe system is mounted, the swivel angle A and the
rotation angle B can be entered additionally.
7. Click on OK.
After confirmation with OK the movement is performed immediately and can only be aborted with
the EMERGENCY STOP.

Machine
11.7 Adjust temperature compensation settings

This function allows you to setup the manual or automatic temperature compensation.
2. Click on the command button Temperature.

3. Adjust the settings to your needs.
More information>>
4. Click on OK.
11.7.1 Temperature compensation
Work piece
Material
A material along with the corresponding expansion co-efficient can be selected from the material list for the
work-piece from the drop down list.
This expansion co-efficient is then used for the work piece temperature compensation and can be recorded
in a program.
Active work piece sensors
This entry is only visible if a WPT100 temperature box is selected in the QUARTIS configuration program. If
the checkbox <Sensor 1>, <Sensor 2>, <Sensor 3> is activated, the corresponding work piece sensors are
included in the temperature compensation.

Machine
If more than one sensor is activated, the average temperature of the active sensors is used for the
calculation.
The activation and deactivation of individual sensors can be recorded in the program.
Temperature limits
The temperature limits defines at what time a warning message is displayed. Enter the minimum and
maximum work piece temperature.
The warning message is displayed as soon as the work piece temperature exceeds or undercuts the
corresponding value.
If a WPT100 temperature box is connected, an additional field for the maximum temperature difference is
displayed. Here one can define how much the temperature of different work piece sensors can differ from
each other. If the value is exceeded, a warning message is displayed.
The values for the temperature limits and the maximum temperature difference can be recorded in the
program.
Materials
This tab sheet contains a table with a listing of all materials entered so far.
By clicking on the corresponding field, new material can be entered or an existing on can be altered.
The materials in this dialog are saved when you quit the entire temperature compensation dialog.
An entry always consists of material name and expansion co-efficient (alpha) of the material.
Delete
The active entry in the table (saved in blue) is deleted by clicking this button.

Machine
Temperatures
Depending on the way the temperature is measured, this tab has two different meanings.
Temperature measurement with a WPT 100 unit
This dialog displays the current temperatures T of the work piece and the axes and refreshes every second.
If multiple sensors are used per axis, the average temperature of these sensors is displayed.
In the column Tc the temperature which currently is used for the temperature compensation is displayed.
This temperature can be refreshed by proceeding as follows:
1. Exit the temperature compensation dialog by clicking on OK
2. Execute the program sentence Measure machine temperature resp. Measure Work Piece
temperature.
3. Start QUARTIS
4. Switch from Offline and Online
Manual temperature measurement
The temperature to be used for the compensation for the work piece and axes are entered manually.
Below alpha the currently selected expansion coefficient for the work piece and the axes is displayed.
The expansion coefficient (alpha) for the axes is entered in the QUARTIS configuration program.
Work piece
Input / Display of the current work piece temperature as well as display of the temperature and expansion
coefficient (alpha) used for the compensation.
X axis, Y axis, Z axis
Input / Display of the current axis temperature as well as display of the temperature and expansion
coefficient (alpha) used for the compensation.

Machine
Sensors
This tab is only displayed if a WPT 100 unit is connected and selected in the configuration
program.
The tab displays the temperature of all the sensors selected in the configuration file along with their place of
installation, current temperature and permissible limits.
If more than one sensor is mounted for each axis or work piece, then the entries are also made for the
current difference and the maximum value.
The temperature limits as well as the maximum temperature difference of the sensors is entered in
the configuration program.

Probe system
12 Probe system
12.1 Information about the probe system

The following probe systems are supported:
Triggered probe systems

TP2, TP6, TP20, TP200.
Scanning probe systems

SP25, SP80, SP600.
12.2 Adjust probe system settings

This dialog box allows you to predefine the probe calibration settings.
3. Define the calibration settings:
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Probe system 174

Probe system
If you want to use a program for the probe system calibration, select if the probe and intermediate
points are to be recorded in machine coordinates or relative to the reference sphere.
In machine coordinates
• The calibration program can only be executed on the machine on which the program was
recorded.
• During the execution of the program no probe system has to be available in the database.
• With star probe calibration programs one has to record intermediate points between the
individual styli.
Relative to the reference sphere
• The calibration program can be executed with different reference spheres (different
positions) and on different machines
Please note that during the execution the first positioning move is executed onto the original
reference sphere. If another reference sphere is active, the positioning command in the beginning of
the program should be adjusted manually.
• When recording a calibrated probe system (reference probe system) is required. This probe
system has to be available when executing the program.
• Star probes cannot be recorded relatively.
Enter the number of probe points for the calibration.
Enter the maximum range for the calibration. If the range is exceeded, a dialog (one can define in the
dialog if the probe system is to be saved or deleted) is displayed automatically.
4. Define the settings for the capability (volumetric probing deviation) according to ISO-10360-4:
Enter the calibrated diameter of the test sphere and select the desired test method:
• HP: Scanning on a known path in order to measure with a high point density
• LP: Scanning on a known path in order to measure with a low point density
• HN: Scanning on a unknown path in order to measure with a high point density
• LN: Scanning on a unknown path in order to measure with a low point density
5. Click on OK.

Probe system
12.3 Switch probing mode

In order to measure elements, Metrosoft QUARTIS supports different probe modes (Triggered, Scanning,
Pecking and Centering). An overview of the individual modes can be found in the topic Information about
measuring.
2. Click on the arrow ( ) in the command button Switch probing mode.

3. Select the desired probe mode.
Depending on the used hardware, different probe modes are available.

All probe modes unlocked on the Metrokey are available in offline mode. Therefore it is important to
only select a probe mode that is supported by the used measuring machine.
12.4 Calibrate probe system

12.4.1 Calibrate probe system manually or semi-automatically
This function calibrates a probe system either manually (all points are measured by hand using the joystick)
(only triggered probe system) or semi-automatically (the first point (the first two points with disc or cylindrical
stylus flat) is measured manually using the joystick, all further points are measured automatically).
Scanning probe systems can only be calibrated semi-automatically or automatically. A manual

calibration is not possible.
In order to calibrate a SP25, the probe configuration has to be known. The probe configuration is
determined using the function Set up probe system.
The form of the stylus (spherical, cylindrical or disc) has to be known for the calibration. The form
is defined using the function Set up probe system.

Probe system
2. Click on the command button Calibrate.
If no probe system is loaded, jump to step 4. In this case the probe head position to be calibrated
hast to be selected with the function Rotate articulating probe system before calling this function.
3. Switch to the manual calibration mode by clicking on .

Depending on the state of this dialog the last time it was exit, the manual calibration mode might
already be activated.
4. If needed, the machine and probe system settings can be adjusted with these two buttons.
5. Manual calibration:
Select the stylus and probe the points - without confirming the dialog with OK - on the reference
sphere using the joystick.

Probe system
Semi-automatic calibration:
Click on OK. Then probe one point with the joystick on the pole of the reference sphere. Thereby the
pole is located in the elongation of the stylus. All other points are probed automatically.
With the semi-automatic calibration of spherical disc stylus, cylindrical disc stylus and cylindrical
stylus flat, one has to probe two points using the joystick. The first point is probed on the pole, the
second one on the side, slightly above the equator of the reference sphere.
Spherical stylus Spherical disc stylus Cylindrical stylus flat

Spherical cylinder stylus Cylindrical disc stylus
6. Enter a unique description for the probe system or accept the automatically suggested ID.
7. Click on OK.

Probe system
12.4.2 Calibrate probe system automatically
This function allows you to select and then calibrate any angle position of the probe system.
In order to be able to use this function, a reference probe system has to already be calibrated and
loaded. The articulating probing system also has to be calibrated.
Only styli that are positioned in the same axis as the probing system can be calibrated with this
function. Thus star probes cannot be calibrated.
3. Select the reference probe system (length and diameter of the current stylus have to be known in order to
execute an automatic calibration correctly. Therefore select a reference probe system which has been
calibrated with the current stylus. When calling the function, the currently loaded probe system is suggested as
reference probe system. The same group number (same number as for the reference probe system) is
assigned to all subsequently calibrated probe systems).
If the dialog for the manual calibration is displayed, switch to the above displayed dialog by clicking
on the button.
4. Select the desired probe head position(s) in the matrix to be calibrated.
With and the matrix can be moved to the left and right in order to display more angles.

Probe system
The probe head position for the selected angle is displayed in the graphics. By clicking with the right
mouse button into the graphics, the display of the articulating probe system can be adjusted to the
mounting position of the machine.
The probe head position to be calibrated can also be selected with via the rotate articulating
probe system dialog.
5. Enter a unique ID and optionally a description for the probe system to be calibrated.
6. Click on OK.
Additional functions
Functions
Opens the machine settings.
Opens the probe system settings.
Opens the function to calibrate a probe system manually.
All already existing probe systems within the selected range are marked/unmarked with a green
check band and can be recalibrated.
All already existing probe systems outside of the selected range are marked/unmarked with a red
check band and can be recalibrated
All defined but not yet calibrated probe systems are marked with a grey check and can be calibrated.
Such probe systems only exist if they were copied from another system database into the current one.
They consist out of a name and the angle positions A and B but do not possess any calibration data.
Opens the list view. In the list view all probe systems with their calibration data belonging to the
reference probe system are listed
12.4.3 Calibrate probe system for PHS1
As soon as the PHS1 articulating probing system is calibrated, a probe system can be calibrated. Each used
probe system has to be calibrated in only one position. All other positions can then be approached using the
function Swivel and rotate articulating probing system without having to calibrate them. As only one position
has to be calibrated, the function Calibrate probe system automatically is not available.
The probe system configuration has to be known for the PHS1 calibration. It can be defined using
the function Set up probe system.
2. Click on the command button Set up.

Probe system
3. Switch to the tab Configuration.

4. In order to be able to use the probe system in each position, the deflection of the configuration has to
be defined.
Select the adequate deflection for the configuration in the drop down menu or enter the
corresponding value.
5. Click on OK.
6. Start the function Calibrate probe system manually or semi-automatically in order to execute the
probe system calibration.
12.5 Set up probe system

This function is used to display and modify the current probe system. Further, the probe system can also be
fully configured so that the probe system can be displayed in 3D graphics.
In order to calibrate a SP25, it is required that the probe system is set up (graphically configured).
The stylus form (spherical stylus, cylindrical stylus, disc stylus) has to be known in order to calibrate a
probe systems.
If the probe system is set up, the stylus form is automatically adopted from the configuration. If one
does not set up a probe system, the stylus form has to be determined by the used.

Probe system
3. Change to the tab Components.

4. Select the desired components from the template catalog (below) and add them to the user catalog
(above) by clicking on . By clicking on components can be deleted from the user catalog.
5. In the user catalog components from the template catalog can be adjusted to the real existing
components.
To do so, the component has to be selected, expanded and the object to be changed has to be
marked.
The properties of the object are then displayed to the right and can be edited.
6. The user catalog can be saved as ProbeComponents.xml file in the directory which is defined under
Common data by clicking on .

Probe system
7. Change to the tab Configuration.

8. Select the components from the user catalog (below) that correspond with the current probe system.
Add them with to the configuration. The components have to be mounted from top to bottom.
Wrong components can be removed with .
deletes the current configuration and one can mount another configuration.
9. Select New Configuration.

10. Enter a name for the configuration.
11. The configuration can be saved as an assembly group under this name.
Click on to do so.

Probe system
The assembly group then appears in the user catalog under assembly group and can later be loaded
for a new configuration without having to mount all individual components.
12. Click on Adopt to assign the new configuration to the current probe system.
13. Change to the tab Stylus.

All available styli are displayed. The status of the styli is shown using different symbols:
Stylus is calibrated
Stylus data has been changed
Stylus is not calibrated
The calibration data of the stylus have been marked for deletion
The detail data of the selected stylus is displayed in the data table.
Calibration date and time
Date and time of the last calibration are displayed.
Diameter
Displays the diameter of the ball tip of the current stylus. If the exact diameter of the ball tip is known,
then the same can be entered here. Diameter 0 is displayed for styli that have not been calibrated.
Range
The range determined at the time of calibration is displayed along with date and time of calibration.
Position
The distance of the probe tip center to the rotation and swiveling point of the probe head is displayed
Offset
An offset in machine coordinates (MCS) for each axis can be assigned for the current stylus. The
probe tip center is shifted by the value of the offset in X, Y and Z. The movement can be seen in the
display fields Position.
Coordinates
Here the direction can be switched from Cartesian to Polar.
Direction

Probe system
This is the direction of the current stylus. For star probes, the direction for styli 2 to 5 has to be
entered.
14. By clicking on the stylus is set as calibrated.
With the calibration of the selected stylus is marked as deleted. If one exits the dialog with OK,
the calibration is definitely deleted.
15. Click on OK.
It is possible to enter an offset for the stylus in case one wants to measure with the calibrated
stylus in a different depth than the calibrated position (e.g. with a cylindrical stylus or for the shaft
probing with spherical styli).
12.6 Load probe system

This function loads an already calibrated and in the database available probe system.
2. Click on the command button Load.
3. Select the desired probe system in the drop down list ( ) or directly from database ( ).
4. The stylus diameter and the corresponding range are displayed.
5. The angles of the selected probe system are displayed under Probe head.

Probe system
When loading a probe system with active PHS1 articulating probing system, the option Retain
angles is available. If this option is activated, the articulating probing system will not swivel to the
calibrated position, but the current position of the articulating probing system is kept. In this case, the
current D and E angles are displayed.
6. The field previous displays the slots which are currently (before the change) active.
The field after displays the slots which are assigned to the selected probe system and therefore will
be active after the change.
Thus it is possible to recognize if the components of the new probe system have to be retrieved from
the stylus changing racks.
7. Different options are available for the change.
8. Click on OK.
12.7 Save probe system

This function saves the current probe system into the system database.
2. Click on the command button Save.
3. Enter a probe system ID or take over the automatically suggested ID.

If an already existing probe system is to be overwritten, it can be selected in the drop down list ( )
or in the selection dialog ( ) from the database.
4. The stylus diameter and the corresponding range are displayed.

Probe system
5. The angles of the probe system are displayed in the fields next to Probe head.
6. The slots of the probe system are displayed under Current configuration.
7. Click on OK.
12.8 Adjust probe system

This function adjusts the position and the diameter of a calibrated stylus based on two measured elements
(one element is used as reference element).
Circles and spheres can be used for the adjustment.
Both elements have to be measured before the function is called.
2. Click on the command button Adjust.
3. Select the element which was measured with the current stylus.
4. Select the element (reference element) to which the current stylus is to be adjusted.
5. Select either Auto (the actual diameter of the reference element is used for the diameter correction of the
current stylus) or Fixed nominal value (a fixed nominal value is used for the diameter correction of the
active probe stylus. If the diameter is set to 0 in the Fixed Nominal Value field, then no diameter correction is
executed, but only a position correction) for the nominal value for diameter correction.

Probe system
6. The offset of the position in X, Y and Z, the diameter correction D by which the current stylus is
corrected with as well as the new stylus diameter are displayed.
7. Click on OK.
The adjustment of the current stylus is executed and the dialog Save probe system is displayed
automatically.
8. Enter the probe system ID or adopt the suggested ID. If an already existing probe system is to be
overwritten it can be selected using the drop down list ( ) or directly from the database ( ).
9. Click on OK.
12.9 Optimize probe system

This function optimizes the stylus diameter of a calibrated probe system based on a measured element with
known nominal value.
The elements circle, cylinder, or sphere can be used for the optimization.
The element has to be measured before the function is called
2. Click on the command button Optimize.

Probe system
3. Select the element with which the probe stylus is to be optimized

4. Enter the nominal value of the selected element.
5. The uncorrected and corrected stylus diameters are displayed.
6. Click on OK.
While exiting with OK, the diameter of the active probe stylus is corrected by the difference between
the nominal and actual value and the Save probe system dialog is displayed automatically.
7. Enter the probe system ID or adopt the suggested ID. If an already existing probe system is to be
overwritten it can be selected using the drop down list ( ) or directly from the database ( ).
8. Click on OK.

Probe system
12.10 Determine volumetric probing deviation

This function allows you to check if a certain measurement is possible within the accuracy and time defined
by the manufacturer (Capability of probing system ISO 10360-4).
In doing so, a sphere is scanned on predefined paths. Specific deviations are calculated and reported from
the measuring points. The deviations have to lie within the manufacturer's data.
The function is only executable for scanning probe systems.
2. Click on the command button Capability.

Probe the pole of the sphere in direction of the stylus.
Afterwards the sphere position is automatically determined with 5 points in triggered mode.
The ISO-10360-4 distribution is subsequently scanned in a second sphere measurement. In both
cases, the distribution is displayed in the graphics. The standard values are used for the ISO-10360-
4 distribution. These values can partially be adjusted in the probe system settings.
3. At the end of the measurement a dialog containing the results is displayed.

4. Click on Close.
The results are saved in the file "Quartis_ISO10360-4_jjjj-mm-tt.dat" in the QUARTIS report
directory. An already existing file with the same name will be overwritten.
If the file cannot be created, an error message is displayed.

Probe system
No measuring element is created nor saved in the database
The function can be recorded in a program. However, no dialog is displayed when executing the
program. The output file is automatically created at the end of the measurement.
12.11 Define stylus form

The stylus form is adopted automatically from the configuration.
If the probe system has not been set up, the stylus form has to be determined by the user.
3. Switch to tab Stylus.

4. Select the desired stylus.
5. Select the stylus form.

Probe system
Sphere Spherical disc Cylindrical disc Flat cylinder Spherical cylinder
6. Enter the diameter of the sphere, disc or cylinder.

7. Enter the height of the disc or the cylinder. The height has only to be entered if disc cylindrical, disc
spherical or cylinder flat has been selected under form.
8. Click on OK.
12.12 Enter stylus offset

It is possible to enter an offset for a stylus in case one does not want to measure with the calibrated stylus on
the calibrated position but in another depth (e.g. with cylindrical stylus or for shaft probing with spherical
stylus)
3. Switch to tab Stylus.

Probe system
4. Select the desired stylus.

5. Under Offset, enter the corresponding relocation in desired direction. X, Y and Z correspond with the
machine axes, stylus direction correspond with the stylus direction from the configuration (including
articulating probing system calibration).
In order to optimize the stylus direction, one can measure a cylinder on the reference sphere with
the cylindrical stylus beforehand.
6. Now the direction of the previously measured cylinder can be adopted for the stylus direction by
selecting the cylinder under From element.

Reference sphere
13 Reference sphere
13.1 Information about the reference sphere

The reference sphere serves as a normal for the calibration of probe systems.
13.2 Adjust reference sphere settings

This function displays the data of already existing reference spheres. They can be changed and saved into
the database.
3. Select the reference sphere using the drop down menu ( ) or the selection dialog ( ). The ID can
also be entered directly.
4. Enter the diameter d1 of the reference sphere (this diameter is determined exactly and is written down in
the certificate of your reference sphere; the number of decimal positions is independent of the country settings
and is 4 for mm and 6 for inch).
5. Enter the angle probing area (this angle is used for calculating the probing points during the automatic
calibration or automatic creation of a new reference sphere. For an optimal point distribution > 180° should be
selected. In exceptional cases (e.g., short styli) it can be reduced, but this can drastically reduce the quality of
the calibration).
6. Enter the diameter of the security area (this is an area around the shaft of the reference sphere which is left
out during the calibration of a stylus).
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Reference sphere 194

Reference sphere
7. Enter the direction of the reference sphere shaft (the direction v determines the direction of the cylinder
that is left out while calibrating a probe. It always points from the outside to the sphere center).
Enter the direction directly Cartesian or using the direction dialog .

The entered values can be inverted using .
8. Click on Adopt.
9. Click on OK.
13.3 Load reference sphere

This function loads a reference sphere that has already been created and saved in the database.
3. Select the reference sphere using the drop down menu ( ) or the selection dialog ( ).
4. Click on OK.

Reference sphere
13.4 Calibrate reference sphere

This function generates a new reference sphere and saves it in the database.
3. Enter the ID for the reference sphere to be created. If an already existing reference sphere is to be
overwritten, it can be selected using the drop down menu ( ) or the selection dialog ( ).
4. Enter the diameter d1 of the reference sphere (this diameter is determined exactly and is written down in
the certificate of your reference sphere; the number of decimal positions is independent of the country settings
and is 4 for mm and 6 for inch).Enter the angle probing area (this angle is used for calculating the probing
points during the automatic calibration or automatic creation of a new reference sphere. For an optimal point
distribution > 180° should be selected. In exceptional cases (e.g., short styli) it can be reduced, but this can
drastically reduce the quality of the calibration).
5. Enter the diameter of the security area (this is an area around the shaft of the reference sphere which is left
out during the calibration of a stylus).
6. Enter the direction of the reference sphere shaft (the direction v determines the direction of the cylinder
that is left out while calibrating a probe. It always points from the outside to the sphere center).
Enter the direction directly Cartesian or using the direction dialog .

The entered values can be inverted using .
7. Click on OK.
The following contextual tab is displayed:

Reference sphere
8. Probe one point on the pole of the reference sphere which is in the stylus direction. All further points
are measured automatically.

Articulating probing system
14 Articulating probing system
14.1 Information about the articulating probing system

In order to be able to use an articulating probing system it has to be selected in the Metrosoft QUARTIS
configuration program.
The following articulating probing systems are supported:
Articulating probing systems
Fix, PH6, PH6M, PH10M, PH10MQ, PH10T, MH8, MIH, MH20i,

SP80, PH20, REVO, PHS1
14.2 Change articulating probing system settings

The calibration settings for the articulating probing system can be changed within this dialog.
3. Define the calibration settings:

Enter the number of probe points.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Articulating probing system 198

For the calibration of a PHS1 you can enter the maximal permitted calibration quality (maximal position
deviation of the spheres per reference sphere position). If the checkbox is activated, a dialog (one can enter
if the calibration is to be saved or discarded in the dialog) is automatically displayed when exceeding the
calibration quality.
4. Click on OK.
The checkbox Message when exceeding calibration quality is only available if a PHS1 is
configured.
14.3 Swivel and rotate articulating probing system

This function rotates the articulating probing system onto the desired position.
2. Click on the command button Rotate.
3. Enter either
• the angles
Angles can either entered manually, defined by moving the angle cursor or by moving the mouse and
holding down the left mouse button on the graphics. Only angles that can be reached with the existing
articulating probing system can be defined.
• the reference element
Selection of a reference element from the database. The probe head is rotated in such a way that the probe
system points in direction opposite to the element direction. The direction can be reversed using the
button.

• or the direction
The direction can either be entered Cartesian or using the button via the direction dialog. The probe
head is rotated in such a way that the probe system points in the opposite direction. The direction can be
reversed using the button
4. The articulating probing system is rotated by clicking on Rotate.
5. Click on OK.
When the dialog is terminated with OK, the articulating probing system is rotated onto the entered
angles.
By clicking with the right mouse button in the graphics the following functions can be activated:
• Machine view
• Head rotation
With these functions the display of the articulating probe system can be adjusted to the mounting
position of the machine.
When using a PHS 1 articulating probing system, it can be rotated with the joystick via the function
Rotate with joystick ( ). This function can also be started directly via the HT4000 with the
function key F9.
The PHS1 articulating probing system can only be rotated/swiveled if it has been initialized. The
exception is rotating/swiveling via the function Rotate with joystick ( ). The articulating probing
system is initialized during its calibration.
14.4 Calibrate articulating probing system PH10

This function calibrates a PH10 articulating probe system.
The calibration determines the spatial alignment and position of the articulating probing system.
Generally only one calibration is necessary. Alteration of alignment or position of the swivel-head or a
displacement of the reference sphere require re-calibration.
2. If needed, adjust the number of probe points for the calibration in the Articulating probing system
settings.
Click on the command button Calibrate.

3. Click on Continue... and position the stylus in a way that the longitudinal axis of its shaft points
towards the centre of the reference sphere.
Probe the first point towards the centre of the reference sphere. The first position is then measured
automatically.
The probe head automatically rotates to the corresponding position when clicking on Continue!
4. Click on Continue... and position the stylus in a way that the longitudinal axis of its shaft points
Probe the first point towards the centre of the reference sphere. The second position is then
measured automatically.

The B angle for the measurement can be reversed by 180° by double-clicking on the marked line
in the dialog.
5. Click on Continue... and the stylus so that the longitudinal axis of its shaft is towards the centre of
the reference sphere.
Probe the first point towards the centre of the reference sphere. The third position is then measured
automatically.
The B angle for the measurement can be reversed by 180° by double-clicking on the marked line in
the dialog.

6. Click on OK if all positions have been calibrated correctly ( ).

The calibration of the articulating probe system is saved in the system database.
14.5 Calibrate articulating probing system PHS1

This function calibrates a PHS1 articulating probe system.
The calibration determines the spatial alignment of both PHS1 rotary axes. The approaching of the reference
marks is executed prior to the calibration and initializes the angles.
The calibration has to be executed every time the controller has been turned on.
The calibration can be executed with any reference sphere. If the calibration is recorded into a program, the
adequate reference sphere has to be loaded previously.
The short stylus has to be mounted for the calibration so no deflection will influence the
calibration.
The calibration should be executed as close as possible to the z-pillar. This way, the rotation of
the y-arm is at its lowest.
2. If needed, adjust the number of probe points for the calibration in the Articulating probing system
settings. The more probe points are used, the better the calibration quality.
Click on the command button Calibrate.

3. Enter the number of positions.

The default angles are automatically calculated and added to the list. If the number of positions is
changed, all default angles will be re-calculated and updated. Certain angles can be edited directly in
the list. The graphical display of the PHS corresponds with the currently selected position in the list.
4. Clear the PHS in order to be able to swivel to the desired position without collision. If a program is
recorded, an intermediate point can be recorded into the program by using the program command
button Intermediate point..
5. Click on Continue... and position the stylus in a way that the extended direction of the stylus points
Probe the first point towards the centre of the reference sphere. The first position is then measured
automatically.
Each successfully measured position is marked with a green check mark in the list. If the sphere
measurement is aborted or an error occurs, the corresponding position is marked with a cross. The
user then has the option to either re-measure the position or to abort the calibration with ESC.
Click on Continue... in order to measure all positions.

6. Click on OK if all positions have been calibrated correctly.

The calibration of the articulating probing system is then stored in the system database.
If the calibration is aborted, the probe head symbol in the status window is marked with a cross.
The PHS can only be used after a successful calibration.

Stylus changing system
15 Stylus changing system
15.1 Information about stylus changing system

The following stylus changing systems are supported:
Stylus changing systems
ACR2, ACR3, MCR20, SCR200, manual stylus changing system,

FCR25, FCR25-L3, FCR25-L6, SCP80
15.2 Deposit probe and retrieve from a slot

This function either deposits a probe into a slot or retrieves a probe from a slot.
Further an existing probe system can be assigned to a slot.
2. Click on the command button Change.
3. Check the current configuration.

This configuration has to correspond with the currently mounted one.
Should this not be the case, change the configuration using .

4. Select the slot in which the component to be changed is to be deposited.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Stylus changing system 206

If no component is to be deposited, select <none>.

5. Select the slot where the new component is to be retrieved from.
If no component is to be retrieved, select <none>.
6. Select where the machine is supposed to move to after the change and if the machine should move
back along the motion path.
The options move to change starting point and move back along motion path is only available
if the change starting point resp. the motion path is defined.
It is also possible to execute a slow change. To do so, activate the checkbox Slow change and
enter a percentage of the normal changing speed.
7. Click on Change.
8. Check the new configuration.

9. Click on Close.
15.3 Define a probe system component (slot content)

The definition of the contents of a slot is purely informative and only serves for a plausibility check if a
defined probe system can really be mounted. The actual probe system configuration in the graphics is not
changed with a change.
Exceptions are components and length information; see hints and warnings below.

2. Click on the command button Change.
3. Select the desired slot in the retrieve from window.

4. Click on Define slot.
5. Define the contents of the slot graphically. The operation of the dialog is the same as in set up probe
system.
Additionally two more properties are available for editing.
The checkbox use length information determines if an available length is to be used for each
change. This option must be used if en extension is mounted, as the changing point is moved by the
length of the extension. The used length is displayed and can be edited if necessary.
Further the content of the slot is also used for a plausibility check to determine if a defined probe
system can be mounted in reality. If this should not be the case, a warning message is displayed
during the change.
6. Click on OK.

15.4 Calibrate stylus changing system

This function calibrates a stylus changing system. The stylus changing system has to be configured before in
the Metrosoft QUARTIS configuration program.
The calibration of the stylus changing system is dialog guided.
Ensure that the measuring machine has been initialized, that the current probe system has been
calibrated and the probe head is in the correct position in which the stylus can be changed before
calling the function.

3. Follow the directions in the dialogs.
Define changing start point

This function defines a changing start point where the machine moves to before each stylus change.

3. Switch to the tab Motion paths.

4. Select the entry Starting point for probe change.
5. Click on Add.
The current position of the probe system in the machine coordinate system is adopted as starting
point.
6. Click on Close.
Enter position correction

This function allows you to manually correct the calibrated rack ports of a stylus changing system.

3. A position correction can be entered for each individual stylus changing system or for individual rack
ports in the tab Calibrate.
As soon as a position correction has been taken over by clicking on Adopt, the corresponding value
is displayed below the stylus changing system or rack port.
The position correction moves the position of a stylus changing system or a rack port by the value that
has been entered in the corresponding field. The directions from the machine coordinate system are
used.
Please note that the entered values are representing corrections in relation to the calibrated position
and are NOT absolute values in relation to the machine origin.
If a stylus changing system as well as a rack port is corrected, BOTH changes are affecting the rack
port.
Define motion paths

As probe system can be mounted with components from different stylus changing systems, it is important to
define the motion paths between the systems.
If no motion path is defined, the system takes the shortest way between the stylus changing systems.
This can lead to collisions with the work piece or a stylus changing system.

3. Switch to the tab Motion paths.

4. Select the stylus changing configuration for which the motion path is to be defined.
5. Position the probe with the joystick at the position where the machine should move to during a
change.
Click on Add. The current position of the probe system in machine coordinates is adopted. It is
possible to add several intermediate points that are moved to during a change between the
corresponding stylus changing systems.
Define the desired motion paths for all stylus changing systems.
6. Click on Close.

Measure
16 Measure
16.1 Information about measuring

In order to measure elements, Metrosoft QUARTIS supports different probe modes (Triggered, Scanning,
Pecking and Centering).
How the individual modes are activated is described in the topic Switch probing mode.
Triggered probe mode

In triggered probe mode, the elements are measured via single point.
Available for element Required probe system Required controller

Point Triggered probe systems WPC2030
Line (e.g.. TP6, TP20, TP200). WPC2040
Plane It is also possible to use scanning WPZ50
Circle probe systems in triggered probe WPZ100
Cylinder mode (e.g. SP25, SP80, SP600, I++ DME Server
Sphere RSP2, RSP3).
Cone
Rectangle
Slot
Edge point
Curve
Surface
Scanning probe mode

Scan paths are measured. The probe system has always contact with the work piece during the probe point
measurement.

Line Scanning probe systems WPC2030
Plane (e.g. SP25, SP80, SP600, RSP2, WPC2040
Circle RSP3). I++ DME Server
Cylinder
Sphere
Cone
Curve
Pecking probe mode

In pecking probe mode, the elements are measured via single point.
In contrast to the triggered probe mode no fix probe point distribution is defined but only default values (e.g.
start and end value).
The machine seeks its path along any contour from start to end point, however, remains in predefined plane.

Curve Triggered probe systems WPC2040
(e.g. TP6, TP20, TP200).
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Measure 213

Measure
Centering probe mode

In self centering probing mode, the machine searches for a probe point in the defined probing direction and
centering plane.
This mode can be used for the automatic centering with bores and threaded holes and for the search of the
deepest probe point in tooth spaces, inner edges and V form flutes.

Point Scanning probe systems WPC2030
(e.g. SP25, SP80, SP600, WPC2040
RSP3). I++ DME Server
If the measurement of an element is started that cannot be measured in the activated mode, the
probing mode will automatically be switched.
16.2 Adjust measuring settings

This function allows you to adjust the measurement settings. It is possible to define the range and the start
values for the ID generator as well as the number of probe points for each individual element type.
1. Click on the ribbon tab Measure.
3. Define the settings for the calculation:

Measure
• Input of maximum range.

If the maximum range is exceeded a dialog (one can define in the dialog if the element is to be
saved or deleted) is automatically displayed.
• Input of allowable probe point number deviation.
Analog to the range of an element, the number of measured points can also be controlled. If
the number of required points deviates from the number of points delivered by the controller
a dialog (one can define in the dialog if the element is to be saved or deleted) is displayed. One can
specify for what percentile deviation the message is displayed.
• If parameter are to be calculated after each point (when this option is activated, the element
parameter are recalculated after each new probe point; if it is deactivated, the element parameter are
calculated after the measurement is terminated).
This function only has an effect with the manual measurement of elements.
• If a dialog (one can define in the dialog if the element is to be filtered, not to be filtered or to be
deleted) is to be displayed when the minimal amount of probe points for an optimal Gaussian
filtering (7 points/wave) falls below the required amount, activate the corresponding
checkbox. This message is only displayed with elements that are measured in scanning
mode.
4. Set the settings for the start values of the ID generator.
5. Scroll down.
6. If Terminate with key press is selected, the measurement is not terminated until the command
button Stop is activated.
7. Click on OK.

Measure
16.3 Measure element

The measurement steps remain the same for all types of elements.
2. Click on the command button of the element to be measured (example circle).
3. Change to the tab Geometry.
4. Define the nominal values with the mouse tool, by pre-probing or by input.
5. Enter the reference for the element to be measured.

6. Select the calculation method for the element to be measured.
7. Change to the tab Distribution.
8. Select the distribution method for the element to be measured.

9. Enter the distribution parameter for the element to be measured.
10. Enter the safety plane for the element to be measured. If a plane is measured, a limitation can be
selected.

Measure
11. Change to the tab Edit.
12. Intermediate and/or probe points can be added to or deleted from the measurement sequence if
needed. It is also possible to edit suggested intermediate and/or probe points.
13. Change to the tab Features.
14. Select the desired features.
15. Switch to the tab Repeat if it is displayed. This tab is only available when measuring points and edge
points and allows measuring several elements from the same element type in one step.
16. Click on the command button Start in the group Actions if the element is to be measured
automatically.
After activating the command button Start, the machine automatically moves to the first
intermediate or probe point of the active measurement sequence.

Measure
17. If a manual measurement is to be executed, switch to the contextual tab Progress.
18. Enter the desired number of points and measure the element manually (see contextual tab
Progress).
While measuring a rectangle, the points have to be probed as follows:

5 points
Start with the first two points on the longer side of the rectangle. All other points have to be
distributed evenly clockwise or counter clockwise, on each side one point.
6 points
Start with the first two points on the longer side of the rectangle. All other points have to be
distributed evenly clockwise or counter clockwise. In doing so ensure that on the opposite side two
points have to be probed.
16.3.1 Actions
The Actions are available for all functions in the group Measure.
Actions
Opens the machine settings.
Repeats the last executed element measurement.
Starts the automatic element measurement.
Aborts the current element measurement.
After activating the command button Start, the machine automatically moves to the first
intermediate or probe point of the active measurement sequence.

Measure
16.3.2 Contextual Tab Geometry
Define/edit nominal values
The sign of the actual direction of a line and a cylinder depends on the probing sequence. If one
probes a plane against the nominal direction, nominal and actual directions of the element have
reversed signs which can lead to a rotation of the coordinate system within an alignment. Different
calculation methods that affect the actual value can be selected for the cylinder.
1. Enter an ID for the element or accept the suggested next free data record number.
If an already existing element is to be overwritten, select the corresponding element using the drop
down list ( ) or the selection dialog ( ).
If one wants to define the ID of an element variable, for example when the element is measured
multiple times using a program loop, one has to enter in the ID input field the following for an output
of Circle_1, Circle_2, Circle:3, etc.:
='Circle_'+STR(i)
It is important that the loop index (here "i") which has been defined in the loop, is set between
brackets.
For a double loop (e.g. with perforated plate), the input should look like this:
='Circle_'+STR(i)+'_'+STR(j)
This leads, depending on the start and end values of the two loops, to the following output:
Circle_1_1
Circle_1_2
Circle_1_3
Circle_2_1
Circle_2_2
Circle_2_3 and so forth.
The reference element ID can also be taken over from the expression editor by double clicking on
the input field.
2. The desired element can directly be clicked on the CAD model by using the element selection tool (
/left mouse button). The nominal values of the geometrical element are taken over automatically
into the fields by clicking with the right mouse button.
For the element curve it is possible that the model does not contain the nominal curve. In this case
the curve can be inserted previously.
3. If no CAD model is available, the nominal values of the elements curve, circle, line, plane, cylinder,
sphere and point can be determined using the function Manually pre-probe element ( ). The
measured values are rounded and taken over into the display. They then can be used as nominal
values.
st nd rd
With a curve, the end point (1 probe point), start point (2 probe point) and direction (3 probe
point) are defined using pre-probing. In order to get a closed curve. the pre-probing is terminated

Measure
using the command button ( ) after the second probe point. The first probe point defines the end
and start point, the second probe point defines the direction.
4. With the elements point and edge point, the command button ( ) defines if the set nominal values
are kept or if they are to be recalculated after the measurement by projecting the actual point onto
the CAD model.
5. With elements that can be either measured as an inside or outside element, one can define the kind
of element to be measured with this command button ( inside element, outside element).
When measuring curves, the command button Invert probing direction ( ) is displayed instead of
the command button Inside/Outside.
6. Depending on the element type the corresponding nominal values are displayed. What the different
characters mean is described in the topic Element description.
The nominal values can be taken over directly from the CAD model using the mouse tool,
determined via a manual pre-probing (see 2) or entered via the keyboard.
For circle and cylinders, the current machine position is continuously taken over into the nominal
value fields x, y and z by activating the command button ( ).
By doing so the probe can be positioned above the center of the bore and the measurement can be
started directly by using the function button F1 on the HT 400.
However, a reference element, the probing depth and the diameter must be defined first. These
values are suggested according to the previous measurement.
For multiple circles or cylinders with the same reference and diameter; this input is only needed for
the first element
Nominal values cannot be enter for curve and plane as these elements cannot be described using
nominal values.
It is not required to enter the nominal values or to determine them with a pre-probing when
measuring without a CAD model. Elements can also be measured manually without nominal values.
7. The nominal values are checked and taken over for the measurement by clicking on .
The measuring sequence is displayed in the graphics.

Measure
Element description
The following table describes the different element components.
Some components are only displayed when defining nominal values, others are only displayed in the
element window or the database.
Nominal values Actual values
x,y,z Position x,y,z Position
i,j,k Direction (corresponds to opposite i,j,k Direction

probing direction)
x,y,z Start position* x,y,z Center of gravity projected onto

reference
x2,y2,z2 End position
i,j,k Direction from start to end position
i,j,k Direction from start to end position
i2,j2,k2 Opposite probing direction
i2,j2,k2 Opposite probing direction
*in element window and database projected onto reference
x,y,z Position (entered or clicked position x,y,z Position of the center of gravity
of the plane)
i, j, k Normal
i, j, k Normal
x,y,z Center point position x,y,z Position of the circle center projected
onto the reference
i,j,k Direction of the reference (axis
direction) i,j,k Direction of the reference (axis
direction)
ø Diameter
ø Diameter
x,y,z Position of a point on the axis x,y,z Position of center of gravity projected
onto axis
i,j,k Axial direction
i,j,k Axial direction
ø Diameter
ø Diameter
x,y,z Top of cone position x,y,z Top of cone position
i,j,k Axial direction of the cone i,j,k Axial direction of the cone
ø Diameter ø Diameter
β Cone angle β Cone angle
x,y,z Sphere center position x,y,z Sphere center position
i,j,k Direction of sphere i,j,k Direction of sphere
ø Diameter ø Diameter
x,y,z Position (center in rel. to length and x,y,z Position (center in rel. to length and
width) width)

Measure
i,j,k Direction of reference (normal) i,j,k Direction of reference (normal)
i2,j2,k2 Longitudinal direction i2,j2,k2 Longitudinal direction
l Length l Length
b Width b Breite
x,y,z Position (center in rel. to length and x,y,z Position (center in rel. to length and
width) width)
i,j,k Direction of reference (normal) i,j,k Direction of reference (normal)
i2,j2,k2 Longitudinal direction i2,j2,k2 Longitudinal direction
l Length l Length
b Width b Width
x,y,z Position (projected onto reference) x,y,z Position (projected onto reference)
i,j,k Opposite probing direction i,j,k Opposite probing direction
i2,j2,k2 Direction of reference i2,j2,k2 Direction of reference
x,y,z Position of the clicked point when x,y,z Position of first probe point
determining the nominal curve
i,j,k Normal of the plane in which the
i,j,k Normal of the plane in which the plane is positioned
plane is positioned
x,y,z Position of the clicked point when x,y,z Position of first probe point
determining the nominal surface
i,j,k Direction of the first probe point
i,j,k Direction of the clicked point when
determining the nominal surface

Measure
Select/edit reference
The reference of the element to be measured can be selected in the group Reference.
The following options are available:
Element Reference
Point
Circle
Rectangle
Slot
Edge point
Line
Plane ---
Surface
Cylinder
Cone
Sphere
Curve
Nominal values
The nominal values are used as reference.
Reference element
Select the reference element in the drop down list ( ) or in the selection dialog ( ).
The ID of the reference element can also be taken over from the expression editor if one double
clicks on the input field.
It is also possible to activate relative measuring.

During measurement of sheet metal parts, frequently occurring springing causes a problem. During
execution of correctly programmed programs, elements such as edge points, circles, rectangles and slots
are not exactly probed at half sheet thickness. In extreme cases a measurement point is missed or a collision
occurs.
Probing of these elements relative to the reference plane solves this problem.
X -Plane
The XY -Plane is used as reference.

Measure
YZ-Plane
The YZ-Plane is used as reference.
ZX-Plane
The ZX-Plane is used as reference
Measuring
With the option Measuring, a reference element can be measured before measuring the individual element.
To do so enter the number of points to be measured and their distance from the edge. Prior to measurement
of the element to be measured, the reference is measured. In doing so, the reference element is not saved
as an independent element.
It is also possible to activate relative measuring.
During measurement of sheet metal parts, frequently occurring springing causes a problem. During
execution of correctly programmed programs, elements such as edge points, circles, rectangles and slots
are not exactly probed at half sheet thickness. In extreme cases a measurement point is missed or a collision
occurs.
Probing of these elements relative to the reference plane solves this problem.
Select calculation method
The calculation method for the element to be measured is selected in the group Calculate.
Element Calculation method

Point Standard
X - axis
Y - axis
Z - axis
Move to nominal point
Line Least squares (Gauss)
Plane Chebychev
Tangential outside
Tangential inside
Circle Least squares (Gauss)
Cylinder * Chebychev
Sphere Minimum circumscribed
Maximum inscribed

Measure
Cone * Least squares (Gauss)

Chebychev
Rectangle Least squares (Gauss)
Slot
Edge point Perpendicular
Curve 2D
Surface -
* Due to the selected point distribution, it can occur that the element regression calculation finds multiple
solutions when measuring a cylinder or cone and therefore does not calculate the desired element.
In this case it is possible to select a different calculation option that influences the regression calculation in
such a way that the desired element is calculated.
Calculation methods
Due to the selected point distribution, it can occur that the element regression calculation finds multiple
solutions when measuring a cylinder or cone and therefore does not calculate the desired element.
In this case it is possible to select a different calculation option that influences the regression calculation in
such a way that the desired element is calculated.
To so, proceed as follows:
1. By clicking on this button a dialog is displayed wherein the calculation option can be changed.
2. The option Automatic is selected by default. This means that there are is presetting for the element
regression calculation in effect.
If the option With nominal values is activated, the entered nominal values are considered in the
regression calculation which means they are set as start values for the calculation.
If the option With probing strategy is activated, the cylinder or cone has to be probed as follows:
Cylinder
The first 3 points have to be on a circle. The remaining points may be distributed at will. The
direction of the cylinder then points from the subsequently following points in direction of the first
circle.
Cone
The first 3 points have to be on a circle. The 4th point cannot be on the same circle as the first 3
points. The remaining points may be distributed at will.
3. Click on OK. The setting is reset to Automatic after the measurement.

Measure
Standard
The calculation method Standard is available for the element point.

The probe point is always evaluated with the given direction and thus can be used unlimitedly for alignments.
This method is generally recommended to be used.
Probed with surrounding points Probed without surrounding points
1 = Probing direction 1 = Probing direction

2 = Probe point = Actual point 2 = Probe point = Actual point
3 = Target point 3 = Target point
4 = Target surface 4 = Target surface
5 = Actual surface 5 = Actual surface
X-, Y-, X-axis
The calculation method X-axis, Y-axis and Z-axis is available for the element point.
X-axis (Point)
Only the deviation in the X-axis is evaluated. The actual point is moved to the nominal point in a plane parallel
to the reference plane in the Y-axis and the Z-axis.
Y-axis (Point)
Only the deviation on the X-axis is evaluated. The actual point is moved to the nominal point in a plane
parallel to the reference plane in the X-axis and the Z-axis.
Z-axis (Point)
Only the deviation in the Z-axis is evaluated. The actual point is moved to the nominal point in a plane parallel
to the reference plane in the X-axis and the Y-axis..

Measure
Move to nominal point
The calculation method Move to target point is available for the element point.
The evaluated is executed in direction of the target point.
The probe point is moved on the actual surface perpendicularly over the target point. If nominal values was
selected as reference, the direction of the actual surface correspond with the nominal direction (image left).
Otherwise the direction corresponds with the selected reference element or plane on which the surrounding
points were measure (image right)
Reference: nominal values Reference: Surrounding points or reference element
1 = Probing direction 1 = Probing direction

2 = Probe point 2 = Probe point = Actual point
3 = Target point 3 = Target point
4 = Target surface 4 = Target surface
5 = Actual surface 5 = Actual surface
6 = Actual point 6 = Actual point

Measure
Least squares (Gauss)
The calculation method Least square is available for the following elements:
• Line
• Plane
• Circle
• Cone
• Sphere
• Rectangle
• Slot
With this calculation method, the regression element is calculated in such a way that the sum of the deviation
squares is as small as possible (LSC = Least Square Circle). Thus the regression element is fitted in the
center of all probe points best possible. No probe point is favored.

Measure
Chebychev
The calculation method Chebychev is available for the following elements:

• Line
• Plane
• Circle
• Cylinder
• Cone
• Sphere
With this calculation method, the regression element is calculated in such a way that the largest deviation to
the regression element is as small as possible (MZC = Minimum Zone Circle).
With a circle, two concentric circles are determined so that all probe points are within one but outside of the
other circle and the diameter difference of both circles is as small as possible. The regression circle is
determined by adding the diameter difference to the inner circle. The regression element with the smallest
form deviation is calculated with this method. This is the reason why this method is favored when evaluating
form deviations.
In contrast to the least square method, the minimum and maximum probe point has the same deviation to the
regression circle.

Measure
Minimum circumscribed
The calculation method Minimum circumscribed is available for the following elements:
• Circle
• Cylinder
• Sphere
With this calculation method, the regression element is calculated in such a way, that all probe points are
within the regression element (MCC = Minimum Circumscribed Circle).
This method is often used for waves which are paired with bores.
If the calculation method minimum circumscribed is selected, probe points have to be distributed on
a sector of at least 180°. The probing range for the minimum circumscribed sphere has to be at
least 180°. If not, an error message that the alignment of the probe points is unsuitable will be
displayed after the measurement.

Measure
Maximum inscribed
The calculation method Maximum inscribed is available for the following elements:
• Circle
• Cylinder
• Sphere
With this calculation method, the regression element is calculated in such a way, that all probe points are
outside of the regression element (MIC = Maximum Inscribed Circle).
This method is often used for bores which are paired with waves.
If the calculation method maximum inscribed is selected, probe points have to be distributed on a
sector of at least 180°. The probing range for the maximum inscribed sphere has to be at least
180°. If not, an error message that the alignment of the probe points is unsuitable will be displayed
after the measurement.
Tangential outside
The calculation method Tangential outside is available for the following elements:
• Line
• Plane
With this calculation method, the regression element is positioned on the most outside probe point in relation
to the work piece.
Furthermore, the tangential line or tangential plane is parallel to the Chebychev line or Chebychev plane.

Measure
Tangential inside
The calculation method Tangential inside is available for the following elements:
• Line
• Plane
With this calculation method, the regression element is positioned on the most inside probe point in relation
to the work piece.
Furthermore, the tangential line or tangential plane is parallel to the Chebychev line or Chebychev plane.
Perpendicular
The calculation method Perpendicular is available for the element edge point.
The probe point is projected perpendicular onto the selected reference.
2D
The calculation method 2D is available for the element curve.
The calculation routine for the nominal positions searches

for each actual position the corresponding nominal position
on the CAD curve.
The image shows the result of a displaced curve.
The residues are aligned in direction of the displacement.
The residues are calculated in the curve plane using the nominal position and the actual position projected
onto the curve plane. This means that the probe radius is compensated 2-dimensionally. This leads to a small
probe deviation if the directions of the individual probe points are not perpendicular to the curve plane.
1 = Curve plane
2 = Probe sphere position during probing
3 = Prone sphere position projected onto curve plane
4 = Compensated probe position (graphics)
5 = Nominal position
6 = Un-projected compensated probe position
(database, element window)

Measure
Eliminate outliers
One can define in the group Outliers if and how outliers are to be eliminated.
The following methods are available for the outlier elimination:
None
Outliers are not eliminated.
Median
If Median is selected, the window width can be set using a second selection. The window width defines how
many points located next to each other are recognized as outlier and eliminated.
With Median a window with the selected window width is applied over the measurement values and then
moved step by step from left to right over the measurement values.
In each position of the window, the value in the center of the window is replaced with the median value (the
median value is not the same as the average value but the median value of the 3 respectively 5 values (Median) in the
window. In the example below value 4 (center of window) is replaced by value 3 (median value). The outlier
is eliminated with both window widths.
If two outliers are following each other directly, the median value is also an outlier with window width 3 but
not with window width 5. Thus two successive outliers would only be eliminated with window width 5. The
following table shows how many successive outliers are recognized with the corresponding window:
Window width Number of successive outliers

3 1
5 2
7 3
9 4
If outlier elimination and a filter are selected in the same measurement, the outliers are
eliminated first and then the element is filtered. For the element filtering it generally is reasonable
to eliminate the outliers first.

Measure
Filter elements
One can define in the group Filter if and how elements are to be filtered.
None
Probe points are not filtered.
Adaptive
This is a low pass filter. The filter characteristic is automatically set out of the measured points.
Gaussian
This is a low pass filter. One can either input the cut off wave length (CWL) or the cut off wave number
(W/C).
CWL
The threshold wave length can either be adopted from the suggested value or entered into the input field.
The larger the threshold wave length (CWL), the more is filtered.
Example
Line with 2000 points and length 60 mm (in each case with previous outlier elimination).
Not filtered
CWL = 0.25mm
CWL = 0.80mm
CWL = 2.50mm
CWL = 8.00mm

Measure
Recommended threshold wave length
Threshold wave length [mm] Probe points per mm Point distance [mm]
0.25 > 28 0.036
0.80 > 8.75 0.114
2.50 > 2.8 0.357
8.00 > 0.875 1.143
W/C
With circle and cylinder* one can also define the number of waves per circumference (cut off wave number)
as an alternative. As long as the diameter of the element was established, the threshold wave length
corresponding to the number of waves per circumference is displayed in the field CWL.
* only with circular or spiraled distribution
The larger the number of waves per circumference with same diameter, the less is filtered.
Recommended number of waves per circumference
Only form evaluation For form and waviness evaluation
Diameter [mm] Waves per Probe point per Waves per Probe point per
circumference amplitude circumference amplitude
[W/U] [W/U]
up to 25 15 > 105 50 > 350
> 25 to 80 50 > 350 150 > 1050
> 80 to 250 150 > 1050 500 > 3500
> 250 500 > 3500 1500 > 10500
For a good filtering at least 7 points/wave are recommended. The option that a dialog is displayed
when this number falls below 7 points/wave can be activated in the measurement settings.
If outlier elimination and a filter are selected in the same element measurement, outliers are
eliminated first and then the element is filtered. For the element filtering it generally is reasonable to
eliminate the outliers first.

Measure
16.3.3 Contextual Tab Distribution
Define/edit distribution method and parameter
The distribution parameters depend on the selected distribution method and the current probe system
(triggered/scanning/pecking/centering).
The function Lift off probe ( ) is available when measuring an element in scanning probing
mode. This function defines if the probe keeps contact with the material while moving to the next
path or if it lifts off and moves in air to the next start point.
The function Consider model ( ) is available when measuring a plane, circle, line, cylinder, cone
or sphere in triggered probing mode.
This function automatically removes all points that are not on the selected surfaces of the CAD
model from the distribution.
Multiple surfaces can be selected by holding down the shift-key while clicking nominal values on the
model.
This function is also available in scanning probing mode for the element plane.
The distribution parameter and methods of the different probing modes are listed in the following topics:
• Triggered probe mode
• Scanning probe mode
• Pecking probe mode
• Centering probe mode

Measure
Point
Distribution not possible.
Line
Distribution method Distribution parameter
Manual Distribution not possible.
Number of points
Plane
Manual Distribution not possible
Mesh type 1 Number of

points
Mesh type 1 Distance

points
Mesh type 2
Polygon Number of
points
Polygon Distance
points
Circles: Constant
number of points
Circles: Constant point

distance

Measure
Circle
Manual
Number of points
Cylinder
Circle
Axial lines
Spiral clockwise
Spiral counter
clockwise
Cone
Circle
Axial lines

Measure
Sphere
Circles: Constant
number of points
Circles: Constant point

distance
Axial lines
Rectangle
Manual
Evenly
Slot
Manual
Evenly
Flute
Sheet

Measure
Edge point
-----
Curve
Number of points
Distance of points
Surface
Manual Distribution not possible.

Measure
Scanning probe mode
Point
Not possible.
Line
Line
Plane
Manual: Polyline
(geschlossen)
Manual:
Kurve (offen)
Manual:
Kurve (geschlossen)
Mesh type 1
Mesh type 2
Polygon
Curve
Circles

Measure
Circle
Circle
Cylinder
Circles
Axial lines
Spiral clockwise
Spiral counter
clockwise
Cone
Circles
Axial lines
The following has to be taken into consideration for the distribution with scanning probe systems
and unknown scan path:
• Cone opening angles between 150° and 180° cannot be measured with the distribution
method Circles.
• Cone opening angles between 120° and 150° with distribution method Circles are critical.
Therefore it is recommended to select the distribution method Axial lines for these ranges or to
select known scan path in the machine settings.

Measure
Sphere
Circles
Axial lines
The following has to be taken into consideration for the distribution with scanning probe systems
and unknown scan path:
• Probing zones from 0° to 30° cannot be measured with the distribution method Circles.
• Probing zones from 30° to 60° with distribution method Circles are critical.
Therefore it is recommended to select the distribution method Axial lines for these ranges or to
select known scan path in the machine settings.
Rectangle
Not possible.
Slot
Not possible.
Edge point
Not possible.
Curve
Curve
Search
Surface
Not possible.

Measure
Pecking probe mode
Point
Not possible.
Line
Not possible.
Plane
Not possible.
Circle
Not possible.
Cylinder
Not possible.
Cone
Not possible.
Sphere
Not possible.
Rectangle
Not possible.
Slot
Not possible.
Edge point
Not possible.
Curve
Find
Surface
Not possible.

Measure
Centering probe mode
Point
2D
3D Distribution not possible.
With the self centering probing in 2D, the search direction is limited in one plane. To do so, the
centering plane has to be defined in the distribution parameters. During the scanning, the probe is
held within this centering plane. The probing direction defined in the tab Geometry has to be within
the centering plane. If this is not the case, the direction is automatically projected into the centering
plane.
With the self centering probing in 3D, the search direction is not limited. The probe searches for the
deepest point in a defined probing direction in a contour (e.g. in a bore).
Line
Not possible.
Plane
Not possible.
Circle
Not possible.
Cylinder
Not possible.
Cone
Not possible.
Sphere
Not possible.
Rectangle
Not possible.
Slot
Not possible.
Edge point
Not possible.

Measure
Curve
Not possible.
Surface
Not possible.
Define limitation
It is possible to define a limitation for the measurement of planes and curves.
Limitation
Limitation points can be clicked with the mouse on the selected plane or curve. Within those the probe
points are automatically distributed when the limitation is finished (right mouse button).
Displays or hides the limitation points.
Deletes the limitation and point distribution.
Reverses the probing sequence.
* Some distribution methods (e.g. mesh type 2) require a certain amount of limitation points in order to
calculate and display the distribution.
This function automatically adjusts the number of limitation points to the selected distribution method.
* This function is only needed for planes and is therefore hidden when measuring a curve.
Limitation for a plane
With the distribution method Mesh type 2, 4 limitation points are possible.
Limitation for a curve

Probe points are distributed along the complete curve by default as long as the edge distance is set to
millimeter. If one wants to measure only individual segments, the limitation points have to be deleted first (
). Afterwards the limitation points can be redistributed ( ).
In doing so the following rules apply:
1. Limitation point corresponds with the start point of the first segment
2. Limitation point corresponds with the end point of the first segment
3. Limitation point corresponds with the start point of the second segment
4. Limitation point corresponds with the end point of the second segment
5. Limitation point corresponds with the start point of the third segment
6. etc.
If an uneven number of limitation points is defined on a nominal curve, the last limitation point is ignored.

Measure
Example:
In the following example two (multi selection is possible by holding down the CTRL-button during the selection of the
nominal curves) nominal curves that are separated by the bore are selected. Two limitation points are set on
the first curve (point 1 and 2). On the second curve five more limitation points are set (point 3 to 7).
After confirming with the right mouse button, the probe points are distributed between limitation point 1 and
2, as well as between point 5 and 6. Point 7 is ignored.
Thin out points
This function allows you to thin out points, delivered by the controller during the measurement of elements
with a scanning probe system, for the calculation of the corresponding element.
The function is only available if the element is measured with a scanning probe system.
No.
The points delivered from the controller are thinned out to this number. This number of points is then used to
calculate the element. If the number of points is changed, the distance between two successive points is
automatically adjusted and displayed in the field below.
Distance
The points delivered from the controller are thinned out to the entered distance between two successive
points. These points are then used for the calculation of the element. If the distance is changed, the number
of points is automatically adjusted and displayed in the field above.
An element can be measured with a maximum of 100'000 points. However, the delivered number of
points depends on the controller and the scanning speed.

Measure
Define/edit safety plane
This function defines a safety plane with a distance to a measuring element. Before and after each
measurement of an element, the machine moves automatically to intermediate points on the safety plane.
This movement is recorded into the program. The function also offers different options:
1. If the option Before first point is activated, the probe is moved from the current position
perpendicular onto the safety plane before moving towards the first intermediate point. Therefore the
parameter safety plane is recorded into the program before the first intermediate point.
2. Specifies the distance of the safety plane. The distance is always calculated from the nominal
position of the element and in element direction.
3. If the option After each point/After each path is activated, the machine moves to the safety plane
and automatically sets the corresponding intermediate points after each measuring point or each
scan path.
The option After each path can only be activated if the function Lift off probe is selected under
Method.

Measure
16.3.4 Contextual Tab Edit

The measuring sequence can be edited in the contextual tab Edit.
It is possible to delete, add or edit intermediate and or probe points.
Only measuring sequences which were measured with a triggered probe system can be edited.
1. Select an intermediate or probe point in the measuring sequence where you want to add an
additional intermediate or probe point.
2. Select if an intermediate or probe point is to be inserted before or after the selected point.
3. Select if an intermediate or probe point is to be inserted.
4. This command button inserts the intermediate or probe point at the selected position.
5. As long as this command button is active, an intermediate or probe point can b clicked directly on the
CAD model which then is inserted.
6. This command button deletes the selected intermediate or probe point from the measuring
sequence.
7. With the selection can be edited. The X, Y and Z values can either be edited manually or by
clicking with the mouse ( ) on the CAD model. It is also possible to adopt the point at the current
machine position ( ) .
After the changes are done, the function is terminated by clicking on again.
Actions
Inserts object before the selection.
Inserts object after the selection.
Inserts an intermediate point.
Inserts a probe point.
Inserts the intermediate or probe point with the defined coordinates at the selected position.
As long as this command button is active, an intermediate or probe point can be clicked with the
mouse on the CAD model. This point then is inserted into the measuring sequence.
Deletes the selected intermediate or probe point from the measuring sequence.
Opens the edit mode.

Measure
16.3.5 Contextual Tab Features

In the contextual tab Features, it is possible to select features of an element that are created automatically
during the element measurement and are saved into the database.
These features are also displayed in the element window under Tolerances and Deviations.
1. Select the features to be evaluated.

2. If the option Dynamic is set, the position feature (x,y,z and d,A,B) are created dynamically. Else,
features are created statically.
This button opens a dialog wherein an ID as well as the tolerances for the feature can be edited.
3. The fields can be directly edited by clicking into the corresponding field
4. Click on OK.
The position of planes, cylinders and lines can only be reasonably evaluated with axially parallel
planes, cylinders and lines in one or with the cylinder in two axes.

Measure
16.3.6 Contextual Tab Repeat

The contextual tab Repeat allows measuring several elements of the same element type after each other in
a single step. This tab is available for the elements point, edge point, circle and cylinder. Thereby, settings
defined in the other tabs (e.g. probing depth) apply for all elements.
The defined ID will be assigned to the first element. The ID for the following elements is automatically
counted up.
1. Select the distribution method.
Point and edge point

Distribution method
None No element repetition is executed.
Manual One can distribute and measure any amount of elements on the CAD model with the
mouse tool.
Number of For the element edge point, one can select any edges on the CAD model with the
elements mouse tool. For the element point, one can select any curves on the CAD model with
the mouse tool. The defined amount of elements is distributed on the selected curves
or edges.
Distance elements For the element edge point, one can select any edges on the CAD model with the
mouse tool. For the element point, one can select any curves on the CAD model with
the mouse tool. The elements are distributed on the selected curves or edges with
the defined distance.
The following applies for the distribution of edge points: If three edges that have the same
reference surface are selected, the selection is automatically extended with the edge pieces in
between them. This can be helpful when, for example, a radius on the CAD model consists out of
multiple small individual segments. In this case, it is sufficient if a first edge segment is selected in
order to define the start of the edge, a second segment in order to define the direction, and a third
segment in order to define the end of the edge.
Circle and cylinder

Distribution method
None No element repetition is executed.
Manual One can distribute and measure any amount of circles/cylinders on the CAD model
with the mouse tool.
Grid Circles/cylinders are distributed on a grid (x, y, z) with a defined increment and
defined amount.
Circle Circles/cylinders are circularly distributed around a defined center. The alignment of
the circles/cylinders is defined via the input of an angle or a division.

Measure
1. Define the distribution parameter.

2. Define any limitations for point or edge point if you do not want to have the elements distributed
among the whole curve or edge.
Limitation
Limitation points can be clicked with the mouse on the selected curve or edge. Within this selected
edge, the probe points are automatically distributed when the limitation is finished (right mouse button).
Displays or hides the limitation points.
Deletes the limitation and point distribution.
Reverses the probing sequence.

Measure
16.3.7 Contextual Tab Progress
Edit measuring sequence
Actions
Accept measuring point from current machine position.
Accept intermediate point from current machine position.
Delete last measured measuring or intermediate point.
Terminate measurement and save element (if enough points are available)
Abort measurement.
View measurement progress
The progress window displays the preset number of points as well as the already measured number of
points.
Increase/decrease number of points
The specified (by QUARTIS) or selected minimal number of points for the manual element measurement is
displayed in the group Number of points.
The number of points can be increased or decreased .

The progress window is automatically updated.

Measure
16.3.8 Contextual Tab Head orientation
The head orientation for a REVO articulating probing system equipped with probe module RSP2 can be
defined in the contextual tab Head orientation.
1. Select the method.

Method
Head probing off Probe points are approached by positioning the three machine axes in X, Y and Z.
The A and B angles of the articulating probing system remain unchanged.
Critical angle Probe points are measured by rotating and swiveling the articulating probing system.
The probing angle α can be limited against the top and bottom via the critical angles.
The probing angle α describes the angle between work piece surface and stylus
direction.
Scanning probe mode

Method
Critical angle The probing angle α can be limited against the top and bottom via the critical angles.
The probing angle α describes the angle between work piece surface and stylus
direction.
Fixed angle The head orientation is defined with the input of α and β. α defines the angle between
element direction and stylus direction.
β defines the rotation around the element direction.
Focal point CMM and articulating probing system are positioned in a way that the focal point
defined by dx, dy and dz always lies in stylus direction.
2. Define the parameters.

Measure
Critical angles
The probing angle α can be limited to the top and bottom with the angles α min and α max.
The probing angle α describes the angle between the work piece surface and the stylus direction.
1 = Work piece, 2 = Max. probing angle, 3 = Min. probing angle
With certain element types only α min or α max can be limited.
Element Effective probing angle α
Plane, Line, Surface, Edge point, inner slot, inner - α is larger than α min
rectangle, inner sphere, outer sphere, outer cone
- α is smaller than α max
Inner circle, inner cylinder, inner cone - α is smaller than α max
Outer circle, outer slot, outer rectangle, curve - α equals α min
Example inner circle:

If the probe head can be positioned in the bore axis and the probing angle α does not exceed the defined
critical angles, the inner circle is measured with 2 axis movement.
Else, the probing angle α is set to the defined critical angles α max and the inner circle is measured with 5
axis movement.

Measure
Fixed angles
α is the angle between the element direction (here z) and the stylus direction.
β is a rotation around the element direction (here z).
If the element has no element direction, the reference direction is used (line, circle, curve).
Angle α and β on an outer sphere:
Focal point
The focal point is displayed as preview point in the graphics.

The parameter dx, dy, dz are relative to the element coordinate system.
dz is the offset from the nominal point in primary direction. The primary direction of the element coordinate
system corresponds with the element direction, respectively the reference direction with line, circle and
curve.
dx is the offset from the nominal point in secondary direction. The secondary direction corresponds with the
direction that is used as start for the sector-angle distribution. With line and curve it is the reversed probing
direction.
dy is the offset form the nominal point in the third direction.

Construct
17 Construct
17.1 Information about constructing elements

Elements that cannot be measured with the machine can be constructed using measured elements.
17.2 Create element with input

Elements which cannot be measured or constructed through linking are created by manual input with this
function.
2. Click on the command button Input.
3. Select the target element. If an element can be created either as inside or outside element, select
the corresponding value.
4. Click on OK.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Construct 257

Construct
5. Enter the parameter of the element.

The input of the position and direction can either be entered directly in Cartesian values or using the
position dialog ( ) and the direction dialog.
The entered direction can be inverted by clicking on .
6. Click on OK.
17.3 Create element out of existing elements

17.3.1 Create intersection element out of two elements
This function creates elements that cannot be measured (e.g. body edges) by intersecting two elements (e.g.
probed plane with probed cylinder).
2. Click on the command button Intersection.
3. Select the source elements.

4. Select the target element point, line or circle.
If no intersection element can be constructed out of the selected source elements, is
displayed.

Construct
5. Enter an ID for the element or accept the next suggested free ID.
It is also possible to take over the source and target element ID's from the expression editor by
double clicking on the input field.
6. If a circle is created, one can select if a inside or outside circle is to be created.

7. Check the nominal values.
If the nominal values can be taken over from the source elements, they will be automatically
displayed and activated with .
If the nominal values cannot be taken over from the source elements, the calculated actual values
are entered; will not be activated automatically. In this case one has to adjust the nominal values
and set them manually with . If is not activated, the intersection element will be created
without nominal values.
8. Click on the command button Construct.

The intersection element is constructed and stored in the database.
The recorded nominal values of an intersection element are always used in a program. If the
nominal values of the source elements are adjusted in the program, the nominal values of the
intersection element have to be adjusted as well.
An overview of all possible solutions is displayed in the corresponding table.
17.3.2 Create symmetry element out of two elements
This function creates an element which has the same distance from the element in the right element window
as from the element in the left element window 2.
2. Click on the command button Symmetry.

Construct
4. If multiple solutions are possible, they are displayed. Click on the desired solution.
5. Click on OK.
17.3.3 Create connection element out of two elements
This function creates a connecting element between the element in the right element window and the
element in the left element 2.
The result is always a straight line.
2. Click on the command button Connection.

Construct
If an already existing element is to be overwritten, select the corresponding element using the drop down list
( ) or the selection dialog ( ).
4. Click on OK.
17.3.4 Create a construction element of several elements
This function creates a new element using multiple already existing elements (e.g. a pitch circle out of
circles).
2. Click on the command button Linkage.

Construct
3. Select the target element. For elements that either can be created as an outside or inside element,
the corresponding option has to be selected.
4. Select the calculation method.
5. Select if the calculation is executed using element parameters (center of gravity of element) or using
element points.
If the calculation is executed using element points, it is additionally possible to select if a probe
radius correction is to be executed after the linkage.
6. Select the reference element - if needed - for the target element.
7. Click on OK.
8. Select the elements to be used for the construction element.

9. Click on OK.

Construct
11. Click on OK.
Nominal values
If a construction element is created by element point calculation, the target element (constructed element) is
automatically assigned nominal values in the following cases:
The target element gets the same nominal values as the first source element of the same type. Let's say two
cylinders are connected to one cylinder, the nominal values originate from the first cylinder. If no source
element of the same type is available, the following rules apply:
• If the target element is a plane and at least one source element is a point, the nominal values are
taken from the first point.
• If the target element is a cylinder and at least one source element is a circle, the nominal values are
taken from the first circle.
• If the target element is a cone and at least one source element is a circle, the nominal values are
taken from the first circle.
The first element is the one that is marked on top of the sorted selection list.

Construct
17.3.5 Create top of cone
This function creates a point in the vertex of the cone in the left element window.
2. Click on the command button Top of cone.
If an already existing element is to be overwritten, select the corresponding element using the drop down list
( ) or the selection dialog ( ).
4. Click on OK.
17.3.6 Create extract element out of curve
This function creates a line or a circle out of the probe points of a curve. The extract element is calculated
out of the probe points that are within a defined search area defined by the range.
2. Click on the command button Extract.

Construct
3. Now click a point on the curve in the graphics and confirm your selection with the right mouse button.
This point is used as start point for the calculation of the extract element.
This point is taught into the program and therefore can be reused as start value for the extract
calculation during the execution of the program.
The ID of the clicked curve is automatically taken over as source element.
4. Select the target element line or circle.

As target element the one that contains more probe points within the defined range is always
suggested.
6. For a circle one can additionally select if it is an inside our outside circle.
7. Enter the desired range. This determines how large the range of the target element can beat most.
Depending on the range and the deviation of the individual probe points more or less points will be
included into the extract calculation.
8. Check the nominal values.
If the nominal values are to be taken over from the curve, they are automatically input and activated
by .
If the nominal values are not to be taken over from the curve, the calculated actual values are input,
is not automatically set. In this case the nominal values have to be adjusted manually and be set
manually with . If is not set, the extract element is created without nominal values.
9. Select the calculation method for the extract element. Depending on the target element different
calculation methods are available.
Element Calculation method

Line Least squares (Gauss)
Chebychev
Circle Least squares (Gauss)
Chebychev
Minimum circumscribed
Maximum inscribed

Construct
10. Click on the command button Construct.

The extract element is constructed and saved into the database.
17.3.7 Create min/max element
This function determines the minimum or maximum point of an element from the left element window in a
specified direction.
A point or a plane with the specified evaluation direction can be created at this position.
2. Click on the command button Min/Max Element.
3. Select the evaluation direction.

It can either be entered or taken over from an element.
The evaluation of the direction can also be executed radial for the elements circle, cylinder, sphere
and cone.
4. Click on OK.

Construct
6. Select the desired solution (point or plane).
7. Click on OK.
Radial Min/Max Element
2. Click on the command button Min/Max Element.
3. Select Radial.
4. Click on OK.

Construct
6. Select the desired solution (point or plane).
7. Click on OK.
The maximum point for circle and sphere is the one that is at the longest distance from the center
of the circle or sphere. The minimum point consequently is the one at the shortest distance.
The maximum point for cylinder and cone is the one that is at the longest distance from the
surface of the cylinder or sphere in the direction away from the axis. The minimum point is the one
that is at the longest distance from the side surface in the direction to the axis.
17.3.8 Create offset point
This function allows you to relocate a point in the left element window and then to save it as a new element.
2. Click on the command button Offset Point.

Construct
3. Enter the relocation vector in X, Y and Z.

4. Click on OK.
7. Click on OK.
17.3.9 Create offset line
This function allows you to define connection lines that cannot be measured.
These connect the position of the element in the left element window with a point that has a specified
distance from the position of the element in the right element window.
2. Click on the command button Offset Line.

Construct
3. Enter the offset (Distance of the connection line from the point in the right element window) direction.
Ensure that the offset distance is always shorter than the distance between both points; otherwise
no mathematical solution will be possible.
4. Click on OK.
6. Select the adequate solution.
7. Click on OK

Construct
17.3.10 Create offset plane
This function creates an offset plane that has specific distances to several elements.
Therefore an offset can be assigned in a defined direction to each element.
2. Click on the command button Offset Plane.
3. Select the reference element for the direction of the distances in the drop down list ( ) or the
selection dialog ( ).
4. Check the direction of the reference element.
5. Click on OK.
6. Select at least 3 measured elements whose distances from the searched plane are known.
7. Click on OK.

Construct
8. Select the calculation method for the offset plane.

9. Now enter the offset for each selected element by marking the corresponding element in the left field
and assign the entered offset to it by clicking on . Repeat this for each element.
10. Click on OK.
12. Click on OK

Construct
17.3.11 Create parallel element
This function creates a line or plane that is parallel to the element in the left element window and runs
through the point or the element reduced to a point in the right element window.
Construction of a parallel line
For the construction to be successful, the elements in the element windows must fulfill the following
characteristics:
Left element window Right element window

Element Element
• is a line • is a point
• can be reduced to a line • can be reduced to a point
2. Click on the command button Parallel.
4. The solution is display graphically.
5. Click on OK

Construct
Construction of a parallel plane
For the construction to be successful, the elements in the element windows must meet the following
characteristics:
Left element window Right element window

Element Element
• is a plane • is a point
• can be reduced to a plane • can be reduced to a point
• can be used as a plane
2. Click on the command button Parallel.
4. The solution is display graphically.
5. Click on OK

Construct
17.3.12 Create perpendicular element
This function creates a line or plane perpendicular to the element in the left element window that runs
through a point or an element reduced to a point in the right element window.
2. Click on the command button Perpendicular.
5. Click on OK.
17.3.13 Create projection element
This function projects the element with the deeper spatial definition onto the element with the higher spatial
definition (e.g. point [1D] on plane [3D]).
In the case of projection of a plane onto a plane (same spatial definition), the plane in the left
element window is projected onto the plane in the right element window.
The result element is always of the same type as the projection element (e.g. point -> point).

Construct
2. Click on the command button Projection.
5. Click on OK.
17.3.14 Create tangent element
This function creates a tangential element.
2. Click on the command button Tangent.

Construct
3. Select the desired target element. If the target element is a circle, the radius or diameter can be
entered optionally.
4. Click on OK.
7. Click on OK.
The following table displays how the original elements (left and right element window) are used for the
construction of a tangent:
Element In left element window In right element window

Point No solution Point
Line Line Line
Plane No solution No solution
Cylinder reduced to line reduced to line
Sphere No solution reduced to point

Construct
Cone reduced to line reduced to line or reduced to point

Rectangle reduced to line reduced to line (longitudinal direction) or reduced to point
(longitudinal direction)
Slot reduced to line reduced to line (longitudinal direction) or reduced to point
(longitudinal direction)
Edge point No solution Point
The following table displays how the original elements (left and right element window) are used for the
construction of a tangent:
Target element Left (reduced) element Right (reduced) element Solution

Line Circle Point Line through a point
tangential to circle
Circle Line tangential to two circles
Plane Circle Point Plane through a point
Circle Line Point Circle through a point
tangential to line
Line Circle tangential to two lines
Circle Circle tangential to line and
circle
Circle Point Circle through a point
Line Circle tangential to circle and
plane
Circle Fit circle tangentially

Construct
17.3.15 Construction Tables
Intersection
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Intersection:
Only element combinations that result in a valid solution are displayed.
Element REW * Element LEW **

Construct
* Element in right element window

** Element in left element window
With intersections of two 2D elements, one element is projected into the plane of the other element before
calculating the intersection point (see table below). The projection is only executed if the element planes are
parallel.
Element type combination Projection

Circle – Line / Line – Circle Line is projected into the circle plane.
Line – Curve / Curve – Line Line is projected into the curve plane.
Circle – Curve / Curve - Circle Circle is projected into the curve plane.
Circle – Circle Second circle is projected into the plane of the first circle.
Line - Line No projection.
A symmetry point is always output.

Construct
Symmetry
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Symmetry:

Construct


Construct
Connection
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Connection:


Construct
Min/Max Element
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Min/Max Element:
Element Direction 0,0,1 Own element direction Radial

Construct

Construct
Offset Line
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Offset Line:
* Element in right element window / ** Element in left element window

Construct
Parallel
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Parallel:


Construct
Perpendicular
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Perpendicular:


Construct
8. Projection
The following table shows all possible solutions for the construction function Projection:


Align/Coordinate system
18 Align/Coordinate system
18.1 Information about the coordinate system

Coordinate systems are used to determine the position of the work piece on the machine and for their
alignment.
To do so, the following different methods can be used:
• Primary direction, secondary direction, origin alignment
• RPS (Reference Point System) alignment
• Define coordinate system using Bestfit
18.2 Switch between PCS/PLCS

This button switches between PCS (Part Coordinate System) and PLCS (Pallet Coordinate System).
Depending on this setting a PCS or PLCS is created with all subsequent alignment actions.
The PCS is saved in the measurement database with the current measurement and therefore can
only be used for this work piece/measurement. The PLCS is saved in the system database and
therefore can be used for all work pieces/measurements.
18.2.1 Activate PCS
2. Click on the command button PLCS.

3. Click on PCS.
18.2.2 Activate PLCS
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Align/Coordinate system 290

2. Click on the command button PCS.

3. Click on PLCS.
18.3 Load coordinate system

This function loads an already existing coordinate system from the database.
Depending on the setting of the PCS/PLCS button, either a PCS or a PLCS is loaded.
3. Select the coordinate system using the drop down ( ) or the selection dialog ( ).
4. Click on OK.

18.4 Save coordinate system

This function saves the currently created coordinate system into the database.
2. Click on the command button Save.
3. Enter an ID for the coordinate system.

An existing coordinate system can be directly overwritten by entering the corresponding ID. It also
can be selected using the drop down ( ) or selection dialog ( ).
4. The following additional options for the saving of a work piece coordinate system are available:
• Interlink RCS, PLCS, PCS and save as PCS absolute (Possible active rotary table, pallet and work
piece coordinate systems are interlinked and saved as a work piece coordinate system)
• Interlink PCS with PLCS and save as PLCS (A work piece coordinate system can be converted into
an OCLS and then be saved as such.).
5. Click on OK.

18.5 Delete coordinate system

This function deletes the current coordinate system.
Depending on the setting of the PCS/PLCS button, either the PCS or the PLCS is deleted
The coordinate system is not deleted from the database but removed from the status. It can be
reloaded from the database at any time.

18.6 Create coordinate system (primary, secondary direction and

origin)
18.6.1 Define primary direction
The function Primary Direction allows you to define the spatial position of the work piece or the pallet.
For the determination of the primary direction, the direction vector of the element in the left element window
is used. If needed, the origin of the desired direction can be defined with the element at the same time.
Depending on the setting of the PCS/PCLS the primary direction is determined for a PCS or a PCLS.
2. Click on the command button Primary direction.
3. Select in which axis the element is to be aligned. The suggestion relates to the nominal direction of
the element in the left element window.
If the button is active, the primary direction of the coordinate system is defined in the direction of
the element. The primary direction can be defined in the reversed direction of the element by
activating the button.
4. Select in which axis the element is to be set to zero. It is possible to select multiple or no axes.
5. Click on OK.

18.6.2 Define secondary direction

The secondary direction defines the rotation of the work piece or pallet around the primary direction.
At the same time it is possible to define the origin in the desired direction. Depending on the setting of the
PCS/PCLS the secondary direction is determined for a PCS or a PCLS.
The calculation of the secondary direction depends on the element type and it's direction:
Line, Cylinder, Cone, Edge point:
The direction vector of the element is used for the secondary direction.
Point, Sphere:
A connection line between the current coordinate system origin and the position of the element is calculated
for the secondary direction.
Circle, Rectangle, Slot:
If the direction vector points parallel to the primary direction, a connection line between the current
coordinate system origin and the position of the element is calculated for the secondary direction. Else, the
direction vector is used.
Plane:
If the secondary direction is defined right after the primary direction, an intersection line between the main
coordinate system plane and the element is calculated. Else, the direction vector of the element is used.
2. Click on the command button Secondary direction.
3. Select in which axis the element is to be aligned. The suggestion relates to the nominal direction of
the element.

If the button is active, the secondary direction of the coordinate system is defined in the direction
of the element. The secondary direction can be defined in the reversed direction of the element by
activating the button.
4. Select in which axis the element is to be set to zero. It is possible to select multiple or no axes.
5. Click on OK.
18.6.3 Define origin
The origin defines the precise position of the work piece, pallet or rotary table.
The position of the element in the left element window is used for the definition of the origin. Depending on
the setting of the button PCS/PCLS, the origin is defined for a PCS or a PLCS.
2. Click on the command button Origin.
3. Select in which axis the element is to be set to zero. It is possible to select multiple axes.
4. Click on OK.

18.7 Define coordinate system using reference point systems (RPS)

This function allows you to align work pieces that do not have any surfaces with a direct reference to a
chosen coordinate system.
Whether a work piece or pallet coordinate system should be generated, must be determined
before the function is activated!
2. Click on the command button RPS.
3. Select at least 3 and maximum 6 elements for the calculation of the coordinate system.
4. If RPS elements are to be selected without changing the already entered coordinates, activate the
corresponding command button.
5. By clicking on , 6 values can be selected that are locked for the calculation of the coordinate
system.
Thereby the 3-2-1 rule (the selection has to be made so 3 values are selected on one axis, 2 on another one
and 1 on the third) has to be respected.
6. As a special case point by point best fit can be used on its own. Hence limiting of degrees of
freedom is ignored. All values are always used for the calculation of the coordinate system.
7. Click on Calculate coordinate system in order to check if a correct calculation can be done. In
doing so, the coordinates of the elements in the input fields are changed to the values of the
calculated coordinate system.
With Reset the calculated coordinates in the input fields are reset to their original value.

8. With Save and Load intermediate results can be saved in a file or loaded from an existing file.
9. Click on OK.
18.8 Define coordinate system using Bestfit

The function Alignment calculates an optimized coordinate system by using a three dimensional Bestfit so
that the deviations between the actual and target geometry are minimized or zero.
In doing so, the actual geometry (measured elements) is compared to the target geometry and the current
coordinate system is moved (translated) and rotated until either the position or the probe points of the actual
geometry have a minimal distance to the target geometry.
The target geometry corresponds with the target values that are calculated out of nominal value and
tolerance. This means that the target value corresponds with the center of the tolerance. If no tolerances are
given, the corresponding nominal value is used.
Depending on the button PCS/PLCS, the alignment is either determined for a PCS or a PLCS.
2. Click on the command button Align.
3. Select those elements in the list that are to be used for the alignment.

A double click on an element displays the target and actual values with the corresponding tolerances
and deviations. The target coordinates are occupied with the nominal values of the CAD model.
Only elements with nominal values can be used.
4. Define if element position or probe points are to be used for the alignment of an element. If None is
selected for an element, it will not be considered for the alignment.
For surfaces one can only use probe points.
5. In case of an alignment with element position, define for which element component the deviation is
to be minimized or set to zero. In doing so either the spatial deviation d, it's individual components in
x/y/z or the deflection and trimming edge can be used.
The following table shows the available alignments and parameters for the individual elements:
Position Probe points

x y z d A B
Point
Point
(projection onto CAD)
Line
Plane
Circle
Cylinder
Sphere
Cone
Rectangle
Slot
Edge point
Edge point
(projection onto CAD)
Curve
Surface
6. Click on Accept.
The settings from step 4 to 5 are adopted for the selected elements.
7. The 6 degrees of freedom (translation in X, Y and Z as well as rotation around X, Y and Z axis) can
be restricted.
These restrictions apply for the entire alignment.
8. The coordinate system is calculated by clicking on the button Calculate coordinate system.
The resulting translation and rotation for the degrees of freedom are displayed without activating the
new coordinate system yet.
The resulting maximal deviation, with element ID and component, is displayed below Deviations as
well as the average deviation of the elements included in the Bestfit.
10. Click on OK. The calculated coordinate system is activated.

18.9 Relocate coordinate system

This function relocates the coordinate system either relative or absolute.
2. Click on the command button Relocate.
3. Enter the X, Y and Z values (depending on the global length measurement settings in mm or inch) for the
relocation.
How to change the length measurement settings>>
4. Select if the relocation is executed relative (the current coordinate system is shifted by the specified
amount in X, Y and Z direction from the starting position) or absolute (the current coordinate system is shifted
to the specified position with the coordinates X, Y and Z whereby the next highest coordinate system is the
reference).
5. Activate, if needed, the checkbox Relocate CAD model with coordinate system.
If the checkbox is activated, not only the coordinate system but also the CAD model is relocated with
the entered value. This is recommended if several identical work pieces are measured using a
palette. As soon as the alignment of one work piece is relocated onto the next work piece, the CAD
model is also relocated onto the next work piece. Thus the CAD model is always located on the work
piece which is currently measured.
If the alignment is only relocated within a work piece (e.g. in order to measure a repeating hole
pattern via a loop), the checkbox cannot be activated as the CAD model must not be moved.
6. Click on OK.

18.10 Rotate coordinate system

This function rotates the current coordinate system around one of its axes.
2. Click on the command button Rotate.
3. Select the rotation axis.

4. Enter the rotation angle (in °dec) or the division or the corresponding axis values (depending on
the global length measurement settings in mm or inch).
5. Activate, if needed, the checkbox Rotate CAD model with coordinate system.
If the checkbox is activated, not only the coordinate system but also the CAD model is rotated with
the entered value. This is recommended if several identical work pieces are measured using a
palette. As soon as the alignment of one work piece is rotated onto the next work piece, the CAD
model is also rotated onto the next work piece. Thus the CAD model is always located on the work
piece which is currently measured.
If the alignment is rotated only once within a work piece (e.g. in order to measure the bore of a
pitch circle via a loop), the checkbox cannot be activated as the CAD model must not be rotated.
6. Click on OK.

18.11 Transform coordinate system into CAD model coordinate

system
This function transforms the current coordinate system into the CAD coordinate system.
2. Click on the command button CAD Model.
18.12 Export difference of coordinate systems

This function compares the position of two work piece coordinate systems with each other. The result of this
comparison can be exported into a file.

2. Click on Export.
3. Click on Coordinate system.

4. Select the reference and work piece coordinate system.

5. The following values appear in the mentioned order (separated by a comma):
• Name of the work piece coordinate system
• Object description (W=work piece)
• Related object
• Unit (M: millimeter, I: inch)
• Work piece rotated (1=rotated)
• Position of work piece changer
• Offset in the X direction
• Offset in the Y direction
• Offset in the Z direction
• Turning angle around the X axis
• Turning angle around the Y axis
• Turning angle around the Z axis
• Carriage Return - Line Feed
Example:
WKSZY,W,,M,1,0,4.482877,21.906707,30.000000,0.000000,0.000000,15.000000
The format relates to the interface standard AGIESOFT ML 2.0 <AGIE-ASCII3>.
6. Adjust, if needed, storage position and file name.
from the database.
Three file extensions are available for the export, however, the output format is always the same no
matter which file extension is selected:

• QUARTIS Format (*.mes)

• Electrode (*.e)
• Work piece (*.w).
The filename can contain a placeholder (* (a star as placeholder will be replaced by the measurement
number) or ? (the question mark represents a placeholder for a single cipher. Thus for a measurement number
in the range of 1 to 9999 4 question marks are required (????). Values under 1000 are complemented with
leading zeros (e.g. 0001))) which will be replaced by the current measurement number.
7. Click on OK.

Features
19 Features
19.1 Information about the evaluation
With help of the evaluation functions, features can be evaluated for the measured work piece.
To do so, standard, form and position features are available.
19.2 Static and dynamic features

Features can be evaluated statically or dynamically.
Evaluate features statically

Actual values, nominal values and tolerances of the element are evaluated statically in the coordinate system
which is loaded during the feature evaluation.
If the coordinate system is changed, the actual values, nominal values and tolerances of the features are not
transformed.
The features always refer to the coordinate system, which was active during the evaluation of the
corresponding feature.
Evaluate features dynamically (applies for position deviation x,y,z and d,A,B)
Actual values, nominal values and tolerances of the element are evaluated dynamically in the coordinate
system which is loaded during the feature evaluation.
If the coordinate system is changed, the actual values and nominal values are transformed into the current
coordinate system.
Dynamic features are labeled as type Dynamic in the database.
Example
Static Dynamic
Load coordinate system 1

Measure CIR_1 with automatic features x, y and diameter
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Features 305

Features
Actual Nominal UTol LTol Dev. Actual Nominal UTol LTol Dev.
CIR_1 CIR_1
x 0.009 0.000 0.100 -0.100 0.009 x 0.009 0.000 0.100 -0.100 0.009
y 0.007 0.000 0.100 -0.100 0.007 y 0.007 0.000 0.100 -0.100 0.007
ø 5.000 5.000 0.100 -0.100 0.000 ø 5.000 5.000 0.100 -0.100 0.000
Load coordinate system 2
Actual Nominal UTol LTol Dev. Actual Nominal UTol LTol Dev.
CIR_1 CIR_1
x 0.009 0.000 0.100 -0.100 0.009 x 14.009 14.000 0.100 -0.100 0.009
y 0.007 0.000 0.100 -0.100 0.007 y 13.607 13.600 0.100 -0.100 0.007
ø 5.000 5.000 0.100 -0.100 0.000 ø 5.000 5.000 0.100 -0.100 0.000
Actual and nominal values do not reference to the Actual and nominal values were transformed into
current coordinate system 2. the current coordinate system 2.

Features
19.3 Reference system according to ASME
The following table illustrates how the reference system according to ASME is converted into Metrosoft
QUARTIS (please refer to ASME Y14.5.1M-1994, Mathematical Definition of Dimensioning and Tolerancing
Principles).
The rules and abbreviations can be taken from the following table.
Symbol Description
A Primary reference
B Secondary reference
C Tertiary reference
PT Point
AX Axis
PL Plane
{LI …} Line through …
{LI … : …} Line through … so that … is given
≠ Does not contain, (not coincidental)
⊂ Contains
⊄ Does not contain

// Parallel
⊥ Perpendicular
∧ Logic AND
v Logic OR (this one or that one or both)
¬ Logic NOT
x, y, z Position in a Cartesian coordinate system
u, v, w Rotation around the x, y, z – axis, respectively: yaw, pitch, roll
γz Relative angle with reference to the Z axis
r Sphere radius
ρz Cylinder radius
--- No entry

Features
Reduction of the reference elements

The reference elements are reduced as follows:
Reference element Point (PT) Axis (AX) Plane (PL)

Point X
Line X
Plane X
Circle X
Cylinder X
Cone X
Sphere X
Rectangle X
Slot X
Edge point X
The individual cases
Sometimes in order to create the cases from 1.7 to 1.10, auxiliary elements must be constructed
so that the axis (Reference B) runs through the point (Reference A).
Sometimes in order to create the cases from 2.3 to 2.6, auxiliary elements must be constructed so
that the axis (Reference B) runs through the point (Reference A).

Features

Features

Features

Features

Features

Features

Features

Features

Features

Features

Features

Features

Features

Features

Features

Features

Features

Features
19.4 Edit defaults

19.4.1 Edit default fix tolerances
The fixed tolerances in the table below are suggested for each feature independently from its nominal value
if fixed tolerances are used for the default tolerance settings.
1. Click on the ribbon tab Features.
2. Click on the command button Settings in the group Default Settings.
3. Change to the tab Fixed tolerance defaults.

4. Adjust the tolerances.
5. Click on OK.
The following table shows which tolerances are used for which feature.
Trimming
Length Zero limited Spatial Deflection Trimming Angle
edge B
measurement features deviation d A edge B measurement
(unilateral)
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
---

Features
---
--- ---
--- ---
---
---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---
--- --- --- --- --- ---

Features
19.4.2 Edit general ISO and DIN tolerances
Adjust ISO 2768 tolerances
For ISO2768 tolerances a selection can be made between the tolerance class fine, medium, rough and very
rough. They apply for machined and reshaped surfaces.
3. Change to the tab General ISO or DIN tolerances.

4. Change to the tab ISO 2768.
5. Select the tolerance class to be used.
6. Click on OK.
The following table shows for which features the ISO 2768 is applied and which size of element is used for
then nominal size range:
Form
ISO 2768: Yes
Point Line Plane Circle Cylinder Cone Sphere Recangle Slot Edge
Point
--- Length Longer Diameter Diameter Length Diameter --- --- ---
side

Features
Size
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
--- --- --- Diameter Diameter From fixed Diameter Length Length ---
values Width Width
Half Size
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
--- --- --- Radius Radius From fixed Radius --- --- ---
values
Position
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
Position --- --- Position --- Position Position Position Position Position
Distance
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance
Angle 2D
ISO 2768: No - Tolerance from fix values
Point
--- From fixed From fixed From fixed From fixed From fixed --- From fixed From fixed ---
values values values values values values values
Angle

Point

Features
Turning Point
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
--- Position Position Position Position Position Position Position Position ---
Position dAB
Point
From fixed --- --- From fixed --- --- --- From fixed From fixed From fixed
values values values values values
Input
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal
value value value value value value value value value value
Straightness
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
--- Length --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Flatness
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
--- --- Longer --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
side
Roundness
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
--- --- --- Diameter --- --- --- --- --- ---

Features
Cylindricity
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
--- --- --- --- Diameter --- --- --- --- ---
Line profile
The line profile can only be used for curves and is not available for other features.
Position
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
From fixed Effective Effective Effective Effective Effective From fixed Effective Effective From fixed
values length length length length length values length length values
Coaxiality
ISO 2768: Yes

Point
--- Fix --- Fix Fix Fix --- --- --- ---
Symmetry
ISO 2768: Yes

Point
--- Effective Effective --- Effective Effective --- --- --- ---
length length length length
Angularity
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
--- Effective Effective Effective Effective Effective --- Effective Effective ---
length length length length length length length

Features
Parallelism
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
Perpendicularity
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
Run-out
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
--- --- Fix Fix --- --- --- --- --- ---
Total run-out
ISO 2768: Yes
Point
--- --- Fix --- Fix --- --- --- --- ---
From fixed values

The default tolerance for this feature is applied from the table Fixed tolerance defaults.
Fix
The tolerances are fix, independent from the effective length.

Features
Adjust DIN 16901 tolerances
For DIN16901 tolerances a selection can be made between the tolerance groups FWT, 110, 120, 130, 140,
150 and 160. They apply to plastics molding parts.

4. Change to the tab DIN 16901.
5. Select the tolerance group.
6. If the tolerances for tool-linked dimensions are to be used, activate the button (button pressed). If the
button is not activated, the tolerances for non tool-linked dimensions are used.
7. Click on OK.

Features
Adjust DIN 1688 tolerances
For DIN1688 tolerances a selection can be made between the casting techniques sand casting, permanent
mould casting and die casting.

4. Change to the tab DIN 1688.
5. Select the casting technique.
6. Enter the largest external dimension. Select if tolerances are applied for length dimensions (button
pressed) or for thickness dimensions.
7. Select the machining allowance. A choice can be made between no machining allowance, machining
allowance and restricted machining allowance.
8. Select the degree of accuracy.
9. Select the tolerance group.
10. If the tolerances for tool-linked dimensions are to be used, activate the button (button pressed). If the
button is not activated, the tolerances for non tool-linked dimensions are used.
11. Click on OK.

Features
19.4.3 Load company specific tolerances
This function loads company specific tolerance tables which are suggested when features are created.
3. Change to the tab Company specific tolerances.

4. Load the tolerance file (The tolerance tables must be available in the form of ASCII files with the ending
*.TOL on the fixed disk or on an accessible network path. These files can be generated and/or processed by the
user with a standard text editor). An example file with the name TOLERANCE.TOL is supplied and is
located in the directory "TEMPLATEs".
5. Check if the tolerances are correct.
6. Click on OK.
The syntax of these files must be as follows:

3.0, 0.10, -0.10,
6.0, 0.10, -0.10,
30.0, 0.20, -0.15,
First value: Upper nominal value
Second value: Upper tolerance
Third value: Lower tolerance
The following table shows for which features the company specific tolerances are applied and which
dimension of the element is used for the nominal size range.

Features
Form
From company specific tolerance: Yes
Point Line Plane Circle Cylinder Cone Sphere Rectangle Slot Edge
point
--- Length Longer Diameter Diameter Length Diameter --- --- ---
side
Size
point
--- --- --- Diameter Diameter From fixed Diameter Length Length ---
values Width Width
Half Size
point
--- --- --- Radius Radius From fixed Radius --- --- ---
values
Position
point
Position --- --- Position --- Position Position Position Position Position
Distance
point
Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance Distance
Angle 2D
From company specific tolerance: No - Tolerance from fix values
point
Angle

Features

point
Turning Point

point
--- Position Position Position Position Position Position Position Position ---
Position dAB
point
From fixed --- --- From fixed --- --- --- From fixed From fixed From fixed
values values values values values
Input
point
Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal Nominal
value value value value value value value value value value
Straightness
point
--- Length --- --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Flatness
point
--- --- Longer --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
side

Features
Roundness
point
--- --- --- Diameter --- --- --- --- --- ---
Cylindricity
point
--- --- --- --- Diameter --- --- --- --- ---
Position
point
From fixed Effective Effective Effective Effective Effective From fixed Effective Effective From fixed
values length length length length length values length length values
Line profile
The line profile can only be used for curves and is not available for other features.
Coaxiality
point
--- Effective --- Diameter Effective Effective --- --- --- ---
length length length
Symmetry
point
--- Effective Effective --- Effective Effective --- --- --- ---
length length length length

Features
Angularity
point
Parallelism
point
Perpendicularity
point
Run-out
point
--- --- Longer Diameter --- --- --- --- --- ---
side
Total run-out
Point
--- --- Longer --- Diameter --- --- --- --- ---
side
From fixed values

The default tolerance for this feature is applied from the table Fixed tolerance defaults.

Features
19.4.4 Select default tolerances
This function allows you to select the default tolerances to be applied for the evaluation.
2. Select the default tolerances.
19.4.5 Select Cartesian/polar output for evaluation
Position features can either be calculated polar (the polar representation describes a feature as distance to the
origin of the current work piece coordinate system (Feature: Position) or as an absolute spatial distance between two
elements (Feature: Distance), thereby the direction is determined with the aid of the associated angle of rotation (ax) and
inclination angle (bxy)) or Cartesian (position and distance are calculated with X, Y and Z values).
2. Select the desired output (Polar/Cartesian).

Features
19.5 Evaluate standard features

19.5.1 Evaluate form deviation of an element
This function calculates the form deviation of the element in the left element window.
2. Click on the command button Form.
3. Enter an ID for the feature or accept the next suggested free ID.
If an already existing feature is to be overwritten, select the corresponding element using the drop
Using the button, nominal values and tolerances of an already create d feature can be taken
over.
4. Adjust the tolerance value if necessary.
5. Click on OK.

Features
19.5.2 Evaluate size of an element
This function evaluates the size of the element in the left element window.
The following table indicates which size can be determined for which element:
Element Size
Circle Diameter
Sphere Diameter
Cylinder Diameter
Cone Opening angle
Rectangle Width / Length
Slot Width / Length / Length 2
2. Click on the command button Size.
over.
4. Adjust the nominal value and the tolerances if necessary.
5. The upper and lower tolerances can be defined according to the ISO286 tolerance system (all
tolerance fields for bore holes and shafts are integrated. The system automatically differentiates between shaft

Features
and bore hole. The tolerance (e.g. H7) or the nominal value and the tolerance (e.g. 10H7) can be entered in
field ISO286. Under certain conditions the system cannot distinguish between shaft and bore. In this case, the
system is instructed to accept the tolerance as entered with a * (eg * 40 * H7 or H7)) if needed.
6. Click on OK.
19.5.3 Evaluate half size of an element
This function evaluates the half size of the element in the left element window.
Element Size
Circle Radius
Sphere Radius
Cylinder Radius
Cone Half opening angle
2. Click on the command button Half Size.
over.

Features
6. Click on OK.
19.5.4 Evaluate position of an element
This function evaluates the position of the element in the left element window.
The position can be evaluated either in polar or Cartesian coordinates. For that purpose, the corresponding
selection has to be made in the drop down list in the default settings.
3. If the option Dynamic is activated, the position features (x,y and z) are created dynamically. Else the
features are created statically.
down list ( ) or the selection dialog ( ). Using the button, nominal values and tolerances of
an already create d feature can be taken over.
5. Select in which coordinates the position is to be evaluated. By clicking on the X, Y and Z buttons, the
individual coordinates can be activated/deactivated.
7. Click on OK.

Features
The position of planes, cylinders and lines can only be reasonably evaluated with axially parallel
planes, cylinders and lines in one or with the cylinder in two axes.
19.5.5 Evaluate distance between elements

This function evaluates the distance between the element in the left element window (spacer element) and
the element in the right element window (reference element).
2. Click on the command button Distance.
3. Depending on what elements are selected, they need to be reduced in order to calculate the
distance.
4. Click on OK.

Features
over.
8. Click on OK.
Reduction for distance feature
The following table shows how elements can be reduced for the distance evaluation:
Reference element Point * Line Plane

Point X
Line X X
Plane X X
Circle X
Cylinder X X
(Cylinder axis)
Cone X X
(Cone axis)
Sphere X
Rectangle X
Slot X
Edge point X
* If an element is reduced to a point, it is reduced to the element position (x, y, z).
Reduction left Reduction right

Point Line Plane
Point

Features
Line
not allowed
Plane
not allowed not allowed
RE = Right element window

LE = Left element window
a = Distance
Example for Line-Line reduction
In order to evaluate the distance a between the two red lines, the lines cannot be reduced. This means
they have to be looked at as splines. Thus the shortest distance between the lines is output.
Example for Point-Line reduction
In order to evaluate the distance between the two red lines, one of the lines has to be reduced to a point
(center of gravity). This determines the position from where the distance is to be output.
If the reduction to a point is not be executed, the distance would be output from the position where the
distance between the two lines is the shortest. This would often output a result of 0mm, as lines never are
exactly parallel but intersect down the range.

Features
19.5.6 Evaluate projection angle between elements

This function evaluates the projection angle (plane or 2D angle) between the element in the left element
window and the element in the right element window.
The element is the right element window is always the reference element. The projection angle is
calculated from the reference element in direction to the second element.
2. Click on the command button Angle 2D.
over.
4. Select the coordinate system plane from which the angle is to be evaluated. By clicking on the X, Y
and Z button, the individual coordinate system plane can be activated/deactivated.
6. Click on OK.

Features
19.5.7 Evaluate 3D angle between elements

This function evaluates the angle between the element in the left element window and the element in the
right element window.
The intermediate angle can only be calculated for direction elements (plane, cylinder, cone, line,
circle, rectangle and slot). The calculated angle corresponds to the smallest possible included
solid angle.
2. Click on the command button Angle.
over.
5. Click on OK.

Features
19.5.8 Evaluate turning point of an element

This function evaluates the turning points of the element in the left element window in an axis of the
coordinate system.
The calculated distances always refer to the origin of the current coordinate system.
Furthermore it is possible to calculate the range between the minimal and maximum point in the
corresponding axis of the current coordinate system.
2. Click on the command button Turning Point.
over.
4. Select the features to be output. By clicking on the buttons individual features can be
activated/deactivated.
The minimum distance in the selected direction is output.
The minimum distance in the selected direction is output.
The maximum distance in the selected direction is output.
5. Select in which direction of the current coordinate system the distances are to be output.

Features

7. Click on OK.
19.5.9 Evaluate position deviation dAB of an element
This function evaluates the spatial deviation d, the deflection A and the trimming edge B.
The following features can be output:
Element Size
Point Spatial deviation d, Deflection A, Trimming edge B
Edge point Spatial deviation d, Deflection A, Trimming edge B
Circle Spatial deviation d, Deflection A, Trimming edge B
Rectangle Spatial deviation d, Deflection A, Trimming edge B
Slot Spatial deviation d, Deflection A, Trimming edge B
Sphere Spatial deviation d
The spatial deviation d is the position deviation in space.This deviation is always positive. At the edge point,
d is the deviation from the actual point to the edge.
The deflection A is the position deviation to the reference plane. Depending on which side of the reference
plane the actual value is located, A is positive or negative.
The trimming edge B is the position deviation in the reference plane. This deviation is always positive.
Exception is the edge point for which the trimming edge B is the position deviation from the actual value to
the edge plane*. Depending on which side of the edge plane the edge point is located, B is positive or
negative.
* edge plane: plane on which the edge point is probed.
Example circle
1=Nominal circle, 2=Actual circle, 3=Reference plane

Features
2. Click on the command button Position dAB.
3. Change to the tab TED.

4. Values for position and direction can be entered directly if needed.
The input of the position and direction can also be reverse using the button. The direction can also
be entered using the button via the position-/direction dialog.
5. Change to the tab Features.

6. If the option Dynamic is activated, the position features (d, A and B) are created dynamically. Else
the features are created statically.
over.
8. Select the features to be output. By clicking on the buttons individual features can be
activated/deactivated.
9. Adjust the tolerances if necessary.

Features
10. Click on OK.
19.5.10 Enter user specific feature
This function allows the manual integration of features in the inspection report, which have been defined with
third party programs or shop measuring tools.
The actual and nominal value can be calculated out of element data from other elements. Detailed
information is available in the topic Calculate user defined feature.
2. Click on the command button Input.
over.
4. Enter a designation.
5. Enter actual value, nominal value and tolerances.
In order to calculate the actual and nominal value out of data from different elements, one can enter
expressions into the actual value and nominal value field. A double click into these fields opens the
expression editor.
Detailed information is available in the topic Calculate user defined feature.

Features
7. Click on OK.
If this command is recorded in a program, the dialog is displayed during the execution of the
program and the actual value can be entered manually.
Calculate user specific feature
It is possible to calculate user defined features with the function Enter user specific feature.
1. The expression can be entered directly into the actual or nominal value field. However, it is
recommended to enter the expression using the expression editor.
A double click on the actual or nominal value field opens the expression editor.
Should you want to enter the expression nevertheless directly into the actual or nominal value field,
the input has to start with an equals sign (=). This defines that the input is in fact an expression.
Output of element values
2. Switch to the tab Data.

Features
3. Select the element of which you want to output a value.

4. Select the needed element component by double clicking. The expression is now inserted on the
right side. The result field displays the corresponding value of the expression.
Offset element values with each other
5. Select an element component according to step 2 to 4.

6. Enter an arithmetic operation sign.
7. Select another element component according to step 2 to 4.
Using functions
8. Switch to the tab Functions.

9. Select the function category.
10. Select the needed function with a double click. The expression is inserted into the input field.

Features
When a function is marked on the left side, a short description of it is displayed in the description
field.
11. Enter the function values in the input field.

This can either be done manually or via the selection of element components according to step 2 to 4.
The function values have to be separated with a comma. After the last function value a closing parenthesis
has to be entered in order to complete the function.
The code completion supports the user with the manual input of functions. Type the first letter of
the desired function and then the command and space key (Ctrl + Space). Now a list of relevant
functions including parameter list is displayed.
12. Click on OK.
The result of the expression must be of type floating point number. Otherwise, the dialog cannot
be confirmed.
Examples of applications
The following expression can be copied and inserted in QUARTIS.
The IDs of the elements may have to still be adjusted
Diameter difference of two circles
Expression for nominal value:

ELEMENT('CIR_1').NOM.DIM1-ELEMENT('CIR_2').NOM.DIM1
Expression for actual value:

ELEMENT('CIR_1').ACT.DIM1-ELEMENT('CIR_2').ACT.DIM1
Pipe wall thickness

(ELEMENT('CIR_outside').NOM.DIM1-ELEMENT('CIR_inside').NOM.DIM1)/2

(ELEMENT('CIR_outside').ACT.DIM1-ELEMENT('CIR_inside').ACT.DIM1)/2
Smallest distance between two circles

VMAG(VSUB(ELEMENT('CIR_1').NOM.POS,ELEMENT('CIR_2').NOM.POS)) -
(ELEMENT('CIR_1').NOM.DIM1/2)-(ELEMENT('CIR_2').NOM.DIM1/2)

VMAG(VSUB(ELEMENT('CIR_1').ACT.POS,ELEMENT('CIR_2').ACT.POS)) -
(ELEMENT('CIR_1').ACT.DIM1/2)-(ELEMENT('CIR_2').ACT.DIM1/2)

Features
Largest distance between two circles

VMAG(VSUB(ELEMENT('CIR_1').NOM.POS,ELEMENT('CIR_2').NOM.POS)) +
(ELEMENT('CIR_1').NOM.DIM1/2)+(ELEMENT('CIR_2').NOM.DIM1/2)

VMAG(VSUB(ELEMENT('CIR_1').ACT.POS,ELEMENT('CIR_2').ACT.POS)) +
(ELEMENT('CIR_1').ACT.DIM1/2)+(ELEMENT('CIR_2').ACT.DIM1/2)
Circumference

ELEMENT('CIR_1').NOM.DIM1*DTOR(180)

ELEMENT('CIR_1').ACT.DIM1*DTOR(180)

Features
19.6 Evaluate form features

19.6.1 Evaluate straightness tolerance
The straightness defines the form deviation of a line in the left element window.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone in which the actual form of the line must lie.
2. Click on the command button Straightness.
over.
5. Select the feature for the size compensation (this feature must have been generated in advance. It must
not necessarily have been generated using the same element to which the minimum or maximum material
principle is to be applied. The selection list displays only the applicable feature types. The following features can
be used for the size compensation: Straightness, Flatness, Roundness, Cylindricity, Form Deviation, Diameter,
Radius and Distance) if required.
6. Select the size compensation to be applied to the tolerated feature.
RFS (Calculate without minimum/ maximum material condition), MMC (Calculate with maximum material
condition) and LMC (Calculate with minimum material condition) are available.
Before MMC or LMC options can be selected, the feature to which the minimum or maximum
material principle is to be applied must have been selected in the input field Feature for size
compensation.

Features
7. Click on OK.
19.6.2 Evaluate flatness tolerance
The flatness defines the form deviation of a plane in the left element window.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone between two parallel planes in which the actual form of the
plane must lie.
2. Click on the command button Flatness.
If an already existing feature is to be overwritten, select the corresponding element using the drop down list (
) or the selection dialog ( ).
Using the button, nominal values and tolerances of an already create d feature can be taken over.
5. Click on OK.

Features
19.6.3 Evaluate roundness tolerance

The roundness defines the form deviation for a circle or a sphere in the left element window.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone with 2 concentric circles or spheres in which the actual form of
the circle or the sphere must lie.
2. Click on the command button Roundness.
If an already existing feature is to be overwritten, select the corresponding element using the drop down list (
) or the selection dialog ( ).
Using the button, nominal values and tolerances of an already create d feature can be taken over.
5. Click on OK.

Features
19.6.4 Evaluate cylindricity tolerance

The cylindricity defines the form deviation for a cylinder in the left element window.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone between two concentric cylinders in which the actual form of
the tolerated cylinder must lie.
2. Click on the command button Cylindricity.
over.
5. Click on OK.

Features
19.6.5 Evaluate profile tolerance of any line

The line profile limits the deviations of any created line.
2. Click on the command button Line profile.
3. Adjust the settings if needed.

5. Select the curve to be evaluated.
The ID of the feature and the ID of the element to be evaluated can be taken over from the
expression editor by double clicking on the input field.
6. Select if the line profile is to be evaluated with or without reference.
Without reference (Bestfit)

The target line and therefore the tolerance zone is fitted into the probe points using a
Bestfit. Therefore only the form of the curve is evaluated
in relation to a reference system

The position of the target line and therefore also the position of the tolerance zone is
determined by a complete reference system. Thus not only the form, but also the
position of the curve is evaluated.
The reference system has to be defined in the tab Datum Reference Frame.
In active coordinate system

The position of the target line and therefore also the position of the tolerance zone is
determined by the active coordinate system. Thus not only the form but also the
position of the curve is evaluated.

Features
7. Select the tolerance zone.

8. Adjust the tolerance if needed.
Definition of Datum reference Frame:
These steps are only necessary if the line profile is to be evaluated with a reference system. In all
other cases proceed to step 11.
9. Switch to the tab Datum Reference Frame.

10. Define the datum reference frame. The reference system is calculated out of the reference elements
according to ASME. Only cases that define a reference system without any degrees of freedom are
accepted.
The direction of the primary reference has to correspond with the direction of the plane in which the
curve is located. Thus it is possible to selected the curve to be evaluated as primary reference.
11. Click on the command button Features.

Features
19.6.6 Evaluate profile tolerance of any surface

The surface profile limits the deviations of any created profile.
2. Click on the command button Surface profile.
3. Adjust the settings if needed.

5. Select the surface to be evaluated.
The ID of the feature and the ID of the element to be evaluated can be taken over from the
expression editor by double clicking on the input field.
6. Select if the surface profile is to be evaluated with or without reference.
Without reference (Bestfit)

The target surface and therefore the tolerance zone is fitted into the probe points
using a Bestfit. Therefore only the form of the surface is evaluated
in relation to a reference system

The position of the target surface and therefore also the position of the tolerance
zone are determined by a complete reference system. Thus not only the form but
also the position of the surface is evaluated.
The reference system has to be selected in the tab Datum Reference Frame.
In active coordinate system

The position of the target surface and therefore also the position of the tolerance
zone is determined by the active coordinate system. Thus not only the form but also
the position of the surface is evaluated.

Features

8. Adjust the tolerance value if needed.
Definition of Datum Reference Frame:
These steps are only necessary if the line profile is to be evaluated with a reference system. In all
other cases proceed to step 11.
9. Switch to the tab Datum Reference Frame.

10. Define the datum reference frame. The reference system is calculated out of the reference elements
according to ASME. Only cases that define a reference system without any degrees of freedom are
accepted.
The direction of the primary reference has to correspond with the direction of the plane in which the
curve is located. Thus it is possible to selected the curve to be evaluated as primary reference.
11. Click on the command button Features.
19.6.7 Select tolerance zone
The different tolerance zones are explained using the feature line profile.
The same applies for the surface profile under consideration if the third dimension.
Bilateral tolerance zone
1=Target, 2=Actual, 3=Tolerance, 4=Deviation

The largest deviation in relation to the target curve is doubled and output as deviation.
The tolerance describes the distance of the tolerance limits (0.1 mm) and not the
distance to the target line (±0.05mm).
In order to compare the deviation with the tolerance, the largest deviation of the actual
curve from the target curve is doubled and output as deviation.
In the image a tolerance of 0.1 mm is defined as an example. With a largest deviation

Features
from the actual to the target curve of 0.04mm, the output deviation is 0.08mm. The
tolerance usage is 80%. If the tolerance is completely used (100%), the deviation is 0.1
mm. This means the largest deviation from the actual to the target curve is 0.05mm.
Bilateral unequal tolerance zone
1=Target, 2=Actual, 3=Nominal, 4=Tolerance, 5=Displacement, 6=Deviation

The largest deviation to the target curve is doubled and output as deviation.
In contrast to the bilateral tolerance zone, the target curve, and thus the tolerance band, is
displaced from the nominal curve. The displacement has to be defined in the group
Displacement. The displacement determines the size of the nominal value of the outer
tolerance limit.
For the case illustrated, the value of 0.08mm must therefore be entered. The displacement can
also be negative.
Unilateral inside tolerance zone

The largest deviation in relation to the target curve in direction inside of the material is output as
deviation. Deviations with direction outside of the material are ignored.
Unilateral outside tolerance zone

Features

The largest deviation in relation to the target curve in direction outside of the material is output as
deviation. Deviations with direction inside of the material are ignored.
19.7 Evaluate position features

19.7.1 Evaluate position tolerance
The position tolerance defines the position of an element in the left element window. The position of the
element is calculated in the work piece coordinate system or is referred to a reference element or to a
reference system. The tolerance value defines the expansion of a tolerance zone.
The type and form of the tolerance zone can be defined in different ways. The position tolerance can be
also calculated applying the minimum or the maximum material principle (size compensation).
The minimum/ maximum material principle can be applied to the element to be tolerated and/or the
reference elements.
The position tolerance can be calculated in a Cartesian or polar manner.

For the different element types the following tabs are available for the position tolerance:
Element type Size

Plane Parameters, References, Effective length
Point, Sphere, Edge point Parameters, References, Tolerance zone
Plane, Circle, Cylinder, Cone, Rectangle, Parameters, References, Effective length, Tolerance zone
Slot

Features
over.
4. Select the evaluation direction to be considered to the calculation for the deviation.
5. Adjust the TED (theoretical exact dimension) if necessary.
6. Adjust the nominal tolerance if necessary.
7. Select the feature for the size compensation (this feature must have been generated in advance. It must
principle is to be applied) if required.
8. Select which size compensation is to be applied to the tolerated feature.
compensation.

Features
9. Change to the tab References.

10. Select the reference:
The position is calculated referred to the origin of the work piece coordinate system.
The position is calculated referred to the origin of the reference system for the reference
elements.
The reference system is calculated using the reference elements according to ASME.
11. Select the reference element (if the position is not calculated referred to the origin of the current work
piece coordinate system). By clicking the button, the element direction is reversed.
compensation.
13. Change to the tab Tolerance zone.

14. Select either a circular or a square tolerance zone.
If a square tolerance zone is selected, the effective tolerance (thereby a line is drawn between the
tolerance center and the actual value and then intersected with the tolerance square. The distance between
the tolerance center and the intersection point equals the effective tolerance) is calculated.

Features
15. Change to the tab Effective length.

16. Enter the effective length or select limitation planes.
The effective lengths define the dimensions (length, width, height) of the tolerance zones in
which the feature is calculated.
Limit planes can be used to restrict or extend (project) the tolerance zone. They can be
selected in the input fields. The plane direction can be reveres by clicking on the
buttons.
17. Click on OK.
19.7.2 Evaluate concentricity and coaxiality tolerance
The concentricity tolerance defines the position limitation of a centre in the left element window to the
reference point in the right element window. The tolerance value describes a circular tolerance zone within
the center of the element to be tolerated has to lie.
The coaxiality tolerance defines the position limitation of an axis in the left element window to a reference
axis in the right element window. The tolerance value describes a cylindrical tolerance zone along the
reference axis within the axis of the element to be tolerated has to lie.
The form deviation of the axis as well as the form deviation of the reference element is not
included for calculating the coaxiality.
Depending on what kind of element (axis/point) is loaded into the left element window for the evaluation and
what kind of element is used as reference in the right element window, either the coaxiality or the
concentricity can be evaluated.
Left element windoe In reference to
Line, Cylinder, Cone Line, Circle, Cylinder, Cone: Evaluation of the coaxiality
Point, Circle, Sphere, Edge point Line, Circle, Cylinder, Cone: Evaluation of the concentricity
Plane, Rectangle, Slot Evaluation not possible

Features
Evaluation of a concentricity tolerance
2. Click on the command button Coaxiality.
over.
5. Click on OK.

Features
Evaluation of a coaxiality tolerance
1. Click on the ribbon tab Features. Concentricity
2. Click on the command button Coaxiality.
over.
5. Select the element for the size compensation(this feature must have been generated in advance. It must
principle is to be applied) if required.
6. Select which feature for the size compensation is to be applied to the tolerated feature.
compensation.

Features
7. Change to the tab Tolerance zone and Reference.

8. Select the reference element (the element in the right element window is selected by default).
9. Select the feature for the size compensation(this feature must have been generated in advance. It must not
necessarily have been generated using the same element to which the minimum or maximum material principle
is to be applied) for the reference element if required.
compensation.

The effective length describes the length of the tolerance zone. The tolerance zone lies
symmetrical to the location of the tolerated element.
Limitation planes can be used to restrict or extend (project) the tolerance zone. They can
be selected in the input fields. The plane direction can be reveres by clicking on the

Features
buttons.
13. Click on OK.
19.7.3 Evaluate symmetry tolerance
The symmetry tolerance defines the position limitation of a point, a line, axis or plane in the left element
window to a reference mid plane or reference axis in the right element window.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone between 2 parallel planes or axes in which the point, line, axis
or plane must lie.
The tolerance zone lies parallel to the reference mid plane or the reference axis.
The form deviation of the axis as well as the form deviation of the reference element is not
included for calculating the symmetry.
2. Click on the command button Symmetry.
over.

Features
5. Enter the effective length (the effective length defines the length of the tolerance zone on which the feature is
calculated) .
6. Click on OK.
19.7.4 Evaluate angularity tolerance
The angularity tolerance defines the position limitation of a line, axis or plane in the left element window to
a reference line, axis or plane in the right element window.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone within which the line, axis or plane must lie.
The tolerance zone lies at a defined angle (nominal value) to the reference element.
2. Click on the command button Angularity.
Using the button, nominal values and tolerances of an already created feature can be taken
over.
4. Adjust the angles if necessary.
is to be applied) if required.
7. Select which size compensation is to be applied to the toleranced feature.

Features
compensation.
8. Change to the tab Reference.

9. Select the reference element.
11. Select which size compensation is to be applied to the toleranced feature.
compensation.


Features
The effective length defines the dimensions (length, width, height) of the tolerance zone
on which the feature has been calculated.
Angularity between two planes is calculated on the basis of the individual measurement
points. An auxiliary element at the specified angle from the reference element passing
through the centre of gravity of the toleranced element is used for calculating the
deviation. The range of the individual measurement points to this auxiliary element is
taken as deviation.
buttons.
14. Click on OK.
19.7.5 Evaluate parallelism tolerance

The parallelism tolerance defines the position limitation of a line, axis or plane in the left element window
with respect to a reference line, axis or plane in the right element window.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone within which the line, axis or plane must lie.
The tolerance zone lies parallel to the reference element.
2. Click on the command button Parallelism.

Features
over.
compensation.
7. Change to the tab Tolerance zone and Reference.

This option is only available when the element to be toleranced as well as the reference element
consist out of axes or lines
9. Select the reference element (the element in the right element window is selected by default).
compensation.

Features

Parallelism between two planes is calculated on the basis of the individual measured
points. An auxiliary element parallel to the reference element passing through the centre
of gravity of the toleranced element is used for calculating the deviation. The range of the
individual measurement points to this auxiliary element is taken as deviation.
buttons.
14. Click on OK.
19.7.6 Evaluate perpendicularity tolerance
The perpendicularity tolerance defines the position limitation of a line, axis or plane in the left element
window to a reference line, axis or plane in the right element window.
The tolerance value defines a tolerance zone in which the line, axis or plane must lie.
The tolerance zone lies at right angle to the reference element.
Form deviations of the lines, axes or planes as well as the form deviation of the reference element
are not included for calculating the perpendicularity.

Features
2. Click on the command button Perpendicularity.
over.
compensation.

Features
7. Change to the tab Reference.

8. Select the reference element.
compensation.


Features
Perpendicularity between two planes is calculated on the basis of the individual

measurement points. An auxiliary element at right angle to the reference element passing
through the centre of gravity of the toleranced element is used for calculating the
deviation. The range of the individual measurement points to this auxiliary element is
taken as deviation.
buttons.
13. Click on OK.
19.7.7 Evaluate circular and planar run-out tolerance
The circular run-out tolerance defines the position limitation of a circle in the left element window to a
reference axis (cylinder) in the right element window.
It limits the roundness deviation and the coaxiality deviation. The tolerance value describes the tolerance
zone between two concentric circles perpendicular to the reference axis.
The planar run-out tolerance defines the position limitation of a plane in the left element window to a
reference axis (cylinder) in the right element window.
It limits the planar run-out deviation and the perpendicularity deviation. The tolerance zone is defined through
two parallel planes that lie at a certain distance (tolerance value) perpendicular to the reference axis.
2. Click on Run-out.

Features
over.
5. Click on OK.
19.7.8 Evaluate total circular and planar run-out tolerance

Total circular run-out tolerance defines the position limitation of a cylinder in the left element window to a
reference axis (cylinder) in the right element window. It limits the roundness, coaxiality, straightness and
parallelism deviations. The tolerance value describes the tolerance zone between two concentric cylinders
parallel to the reference axis.
Total planar run-out tolerance defines the position limitation of a plane in the left element window to a
reference axis (cylinder) in the right element window. It limits the planar run-out deviation and the
perpendicularity deviation. The tolerance zone is defined through two parallel planes that lie at a certain
distance (tolerance value) perpendicular to the reference axis.
2. Click on Total run-out.
over.
5. Click on OK.

Report
20 Report
20.1 Information about the report

The report is used to record reproducible measurement results in a document.
In order to be able to provide compelling reports, diagrams, tables, pictures and drawing objects can be
inserted into the report.
20.2 Create new report

This function creates a new report, new template or new report paper.

2. Click on New.
3. Click on Report.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Report 384

Report
4. Select one of the following options:

Report
This option creates a new report. As report template the standard template defined in the QUARTIS
settings is used.
In case no report template was selected in the QUARTIS settings, no template is used at all.
Report from template
This option creates a new report using a report template.
The report template to be used can be selected in the subsequent dialog.

Report
20.3 Create new report template

This function creates a new report template.

2. Click on New.
3. Click on Report.
4. Select the option report template.

Report
20.4 Create new report paper

This function creates a new report paper.

2. Click on New.
3. Click on Report.
4. Select the option report paper.

Report
20.5 Open report, template or report paper

This function opens an existing report, template or report paper.

2. Click on Open.
3. Click on Report.
4. Select the desired report or template and click on Open.
The report or template is loaded and can be edited.
20.6 Save report, template or report paper

This function saves the currently active report or template (report template or report paper).

Report

2. Click on Save
3. Click on Report.
4. Enter a filename for the report or template and click on Save.
The file name of a report can also be defined using the expression editor. In doing so, one can for
example, add the current measurement ID to the file name of the report.
With expressions one can automatically compile report file names using already stored information
from the database.
The expression editor is opened by clicking on the button Expression editor....
All available fields are listed in the expression editor. The spelling of a file name using variables is
described in the topic Expression Editor.
A report can be saved in different formats:
• QUARTIS reports (*QrtReport): Saves the report in the internal Metrosoft QUARTIS format
• PDF (*pdf)
• Text (spaces-formatted) (*.txt)
• CSV (separators-separated) (*.csv)
• QUARTIS report templates (*.QrtReportTpl): Graphics and tables are automatically replaced
with the corresponding place holders

Report
20.7 Print report, template or report paper

This function prints the currently active report or template (report template or report paper)

2. Click on Print
3. Click on Report.
4. Adjust the printer settings if needed.
20.8 Display and edit report

This function displays the Report window in the workspace.

Report
2. Click on Work window

3. Click on Report.
4. The Report window is displayed in the workspace.
20.9 Close report work window

This function closes the report work window.
1. Activate the work window Report.

2. Activate the contextual tab Report.
20.10 Change default settings

20.10.1 Adjust report settings
This function allows you to adjust the report settings.


Report
4. Adjust the language and templates settings.

5. Adjust the colors and warning limits.
6. Scroll down.
7. Adjust the auxiliary grid settings.

8. Click on OK.

Report
20.10.2 Filter features for report
This function filters features that are to be considered in the report.

3. Click on the command button Filter.
4. Decide if the features to be filtered are limited via a manual selection. Only selected elements from
the list are evaluated
5. Select if the features to be filtered are limited via feature deviation.
Features with deviation out of

Only features with a deviation out of the defined range are displayed.
Features with deviation within
Only features with a deviation within the defined range are displayed.

Report
6. Select if features without tolerance zone (all features with no tolerance zone are not evaluated in the report)
are ignored.
7. Click on OK.
20.10.3 Create table and data label layout
Create table layout
This function allows you to create a table layout.

3. Click on the command button Layouts.
4. Select Table in the type field.

5. Customize the table according to your needs.

Report
6. By double clicking on a value of the fields it is taken over into the marked cell. All functions are listed
in the table below.
7. Click on OK.
8. Confirm the displayed dialog in order to save the new layout.
Layout editor
Creates a new layout template.
Opens an existing layout template.
Saves the current layout template.
Inserts a column left to the selection. If the column is to be inserted right to the selection,
push down the CTRL button when calling this function.
Inserts a row above the selection. If the row is to be inserted below the selection push down
the CTRL button while calling this function.
Merges the selected cells.
Splits the selected cells.
Cuts the selection.
Copies the selection.
Inserts the contents of the clipboard.
Deletes the selected row.
Deletes the selected column.
Switches the display in the cells from expression to value.

Defines a header line. The header line is displayed at the beginning of a table and on each
new report page.
Defines a separator (empty line).
Changes the font.
Changes the font size.
Changes the font color.

Formats the selected text bold.
Formats the selected text italic
Underlines the selected text.
Aligns the selected text/current row to the left.
Centers the selected text/current row.
Aligns the selected text/current row to the right.
Changes the filling color.
Changes the border color.

Report
Adjust the width of the selected column. The height of the line is defined by the font size.
Create layout for point label
This function allows you to define a layout for point labels.

4. Select Point in the type field.

6. By double clicking on a value of the fields it is taken over into the marked cell.
All functions are listed in the table below.

Report
7. Click on OK.
Layout editor
Cuts the selection.
Not available for point labels.
Not available for point labels.
Changes the font.


Report
Create layout for element label
This function allows you to define a layout for element labels.

4. Select Element in the type field.

7. Click on OK.

Report
Layout editor
Cuts the selection.
Not available for element boxes.
Not available for element boxes.
Changes the font.


Report
Create layout for feature label
This function allows you to define a layout for feature labels.

4. Select Feature in the type field.

7. Click on OK.

Report
Layout editor
Cuts the selection.

Defines a header line. Header lines are output only once per feature box. The other lines are
repeated, corresponding to the number of features reported in the box.
Defines a separator (empty line).
Changes the font.


Report
20.11 Insert report objects

20.11.1 Insert graphics view
This function inserts a graphics into the report.

3. Click on the command button Graphics.
4. Select the area where the graphics is to be inserted. As soon as the left mouse button is release, the
graphics is inserted.
The display and view of the graphics can now be adjusted with the functions of the graphics ribbon.
One can define, among other things, if an element graphics (element details from left element
window) or the model graphics (CAD model with all elements) is to be reported as graphics.
5. Click on the command button Adopt view.

Report
6. Select the features, elements or points that are to be inserted together with the graphics into the
report.
With / you can select features/elements/points or remove them from the selection. The
selection can also be carried out by double clicking.
Points can only be selected if an element graphics is inserted. The feature and element selection
is filtered during the insertion of an element graphics. Only features that tolerate the element in the
left element window can be selected. Only the element in the left element window can be selected
as element label.
7. Switch to the tab Layout.

If needed you can adjust the layout for the feature, element or point labels.

Report
8. Switch to the tab Arrangement.

9. Select the desired arrangement of the labels.
Features that tolerate the same element can be displayed in a single feature label. To do so,
activate the checkbox for the function Combine features belonging to each other in one label.
This will reduce the amount of feature labels in the graphical evaluation, which leads to a well
arranged overview.
10. Click on OK.

The graphic and the corresponding feature, element or point labels are now inserted into the report.
If a report template is created a place holder for the graphics will be inserted into the report.
20.11.2 Insert table
This function inserts a table into the report.


Report
3. Click on the command button Table.
4. Select the area where the table is to be inserted. As soon as the left mouse button is released, the
table is inserted.
5. Select the features to be inserted into the table.

Features can be added or removed from the selection with / . The selection can also be done by
double clicking.
6. With the function Insert text field ( ) one can insert comments between features in the table. The
text fields can be deleted with the function Delete text field ( ).
The text field can be edited by double clicking on the corresponding text line or by using the function
Edit text field ( ).
7. If you want to filter features and only output text if the corresponding features are output, you can
group the corresponding features with the text field ( ). Groups can be ungrouped at any time by
using the corresponding command button ( ).

Report
8. Switch the tab Layout.

9. Adjust, if needed, the table layout.
10. Click on OK.
The table, including the features to be output, is now inserted into the report.
In case you create a report template, a table placeholder is inserted into the report template.

Report
20.12 Insert drawing objects

20.12.1 Insert new page
This function inserts a new page into the report.

3. Click on New Page.
4. Select the desired page layout.
20.12.2 Delete selected pages
This function deletes the current page of the report.


Report
3. Click on Delete Page.

Confirm the dialog.
20.12.3 Insert text field
This function inserts a text box into the report.

3. Click on Text field.
4. Select the area where the text box is to be inserted with the mouse. As soon as the left mouse
button is released, the dialog Edit text field is displayed and the text can be entered.
With the function Edit text box one can edit the contents of the text box.
The text field can be adjusted using the functions in the contextual tabs Object and Effect.

Report
20.12.4 Insert line/arrow
This function inserts a line/arrow into the report.
Insert line

3. Click on Line/Arrow.
4. Select a start point by clicking and holding down the left mouse button and draw the line to the
desired end point. As soon as the left mouse button is released, the line is inserted.
The line can be adjusted using the functions in the contextual tabs Object and Effect.
Insert arrow
1. Insert a line as described above and selected it.
1. Change to the contextual tab Object.

Report
2. Move to the catalog Arrows.

3. Select end and start symbol for the arrow in the corresponding drop down list.
The arrow can be adjusted using the functions in the contextual tabs Object and Effect.
20.12.5 Insert rectangle
This function inserts a rectangle into the report.

3. Click on Rectangle.
4. Select the area where the rectangle is to be inserted with the mouse. As soon as the left mouse
button is released, the rectangle is inserted.
The rectangle can be adjusted using the functions in the contextual tabs Object and Effect.

Report
20.12.6 Insert ellipse/circle
This function inserts an ellipse/circle into the report.

3. Click on Ellipse/Circle.
4. Select the area where the ellipse/circle is to be inserted with the mouse. As soon as the left mouse
button is released, the ellipse/circle is inserted.
The ellipse/circle can be adjusted using the functions in the contextual tabs Object and Effect.
20.12.7 Insert image
This function inserts a picture into the report.
Pictures require quite some memory in the report. In order to keep the report size small, only pictures
in JPEG format and graphics in PNG format should be inserted into the report.

Report
3. Click on Picture.
4. Select the area where the picture is to be inserted with the mouse. As soon as the left mouse button
is released, the picture can be selected in the dialog.
The pictured can be adjusted using the functions in the contextual tabs Object and Effect.
20.13 Customize report view in work window
The view of the report work window can be adjusted in the catalog View in the tab Report.
View
Fit view to page width (page is zoomed to page width)
Fit view to page (whole page is displayed in the work window)
Refresh report view
Zoom in
Zoom out
Activate/deactivate display of mini pages on the left side of the work window
Display previous page
Display next page
Display paper layers
Close work window

Report
20.14 Customize objects

20.14.1 Edit
These functions can be used to edit the report objects.
Report objects can be edited in the catalog Edit in the contextual tab Object.
Edit
Cuts the selected report object.
Copies the selected report object into the clipboard.
Inserts the content from the clipboard.
Deletes the selected report object.
Jumps one work step back.
Activates the edit mode for the selected report object (only available for table and
graphics).
Redo's the last work step.
20.14.2 Align objects
These functions allow the alignment of several report and drawing objects.
The alignment functions can be activated in the catalog Align in the contextual tab Object.
Some functions are only available if at least two objects are selected. Multiple objects can be
selected by using the SHIFT button.
Align objects
Brings the selected object to the front.
Sends the selected object to the back.
Groups the selected objects.
Brings the selected objet on layer up.
Sends the selected object one layer down.

Report
Ungroups a group.
Align left edges of selected objects.
Align horizontal centers of selected objects.
Align right edges of selected objects.
Align top edges of selected objects.
Align vertical centers of selected objects.
Align bottom edges of selected objects.
20.14.3 Adjust format
These functions allow you to position and format a selected report object.
The selected report object can be adjusted in the catalog Format in the contextual tab Object.
Adjust format
Adjusts the position in reference to the left page margin.
Adjusts the position in reference to the top page margin.
Adjust the rotation in reference to the page horizontal.
Adjusts the width of the report object.
Adjusts the height of the report object.
Adjusts the transparency of the report object.
20.14.4 Adjust margins
These functions allow you to adjust the margins of the current report page.
The margins of the current report page can be adjusted in the catalog Margin in the contextual tab Object.
Adjust margins
Adjusts the left margin.
Adjusts the top margin.

Report
Adjusts the bottom margin.

Adjusts the right margin.
20.14.5 Adjust paper format
These functions allow you to adjust the paper format of the current report page.
The paper format of the current report page can be adjusted in the catalog Format in the contextual tab
Object.
Adjust paper format
Adjusts the paper format of the current report page.

Sets the paper format of the current report page to portrait format.
Sets the paper format of the current report page to landscape format.
Adjusts the paper format width of the of the current report page.
Adjusts the paper format height of the of the current report page.
20.14.6 Adjust paper
These functions allow you to assign report papers to the first, the following and the last page of the report.
The report paper file for the corresponding page can be selected in the catalog Paper in the contextual tab
Object.
20.14.7 Set anchor
These functions allow you to anchor a drawing object at a defined position.
The anchored drawing object can be adjusted in the catalog Anchor in the contextual tab Object.

Report
Set anchor
Standard.
Fix distance to top margin.
Fix distance to left margin.
Scale width proportionally to higher object.
Fix distance to right margin.
Fix distance to bottom margin.
Scale height proportionally to higher object.
20.14.8 Adjust table contents, graphics contents, table and data label layout
These functions allow you to adjust tables and graphics directly in the report.
Table
Table
Adjusts the contents of the selected table.
Allows selecting the layout of the current table using a drop down field. Via the option
user defined one can also create a new layout.
Graphics
Graphics
Adjust the selection and alignment of data labels. To do so, a graphics object has to
be selected beforehand.
Allows selecting the layout for the selected data labels using a drop down field. Via
the option user defined one can also create a new layout.

Report
20.14.9 Align data labels
These functions allow you to align feature, element labels around the graphics.
The functions are available in the catalog Boxes in the contextual tab Object.
These functions are only available for the report objects feature and element labels.
Align data labels

Aligns labels on top of the graphics.
Aligns labels to the left of the graphics.
Aligns labels to the right of the graphics.
Aligns labels on bottom of the graphics.
Re-aligns data labels.
20.14.10 Edit text field
This function opens the text editor in order to edit the text of the selected text box.
The text editor can be opened in the catalog Text Box in the contextual tab Object.
The text editor is only available for the drawing object Text Box.
Edit text field
Opens the text editor.
Text Editor
Text editor
Changes the font type of the selected text.
Changes the font size of the selected text.

Report
Changes the font color of the selected text.

Formats the selected text italic.
Aligns the selected text to the left.
Centers the selected text.
Aligns the selected text to the right.
Bullets.
Increases indent.
Decreases indent.
Insert/edit expression.
Switch between expression and result view.
With Ctrl + Tab tabulators are inserted into the text box.
20.14.11 Adjust color and line settings
These functions allow the adjustment of the display of a line in the report.
The functions are available in the catalog Colors and Lines in the contextual tab Object.
These functions are only available for the drawing objects Line/Arrow, Rectangle and
Ellipse/Circle.
Adjust color and line settings

Adjusts the line color.
Adjusts the line width
Adjusts the fill color.
Adjust the transparency of the fill color.

Report
20.14.12 Adjust corners
These functions allow you to adjust the display of the corner of a rectangle.
The corner settings can be adjusted in the catalog Corners in the contextual tab Objects.
These functions are only available for the drawing object Rectangle.
Adjust corners
Adjusts the width of the corner curve.
Adjusts the height of the corner curve.
20.14.13 Adjust arrows
These functions allow you to adjust the display of an arrow in the report.
The arrow settings can be adjusted in the catalog Arrows in the contextual tab Object.
These functions are only available for the drawing object Line/Arrow.
Adjust arrows
Adjusts the start or end symbol of the line/arrow.
Adjusts the symbol width of a start or end point.

Adjusts the symbol length of a start or end point.

Report
20.14.14 Adjust image
These functions adjust the display of a picture image in the report.
The picture settings can be adjusted in the catalog Picture of the contextual tab Object.
The functions are only available for the drawing object picture.
Adjust image
Loads a picture file. The selected picture is replaced.
Displays the picture in original size in the available object frame.
Fits image as large as possible in available object frame. The aspect ratio remains.
Scales picture to the available object frame. The aspect ratio might not remain the
same.
20.15 Customize effects

20.15.1 Adjust frame
These functions are used to assign a border to a drawing object in the frame.
The border properties can be adjusted in the catalog Border of the contextual tab Effect.
These functions are only available for the drawing objects text field, rectangle, ellipse/circle and
image.
Adjust frame
Adjusts the border color.

Adjusts the line weight.
Adjusts the distance from the border to the drawing object.
Adjusts the fill color of the frame.
Adjusts the transparency of the background fill color of the border.

Report
Adjusts the corner radius of the frame.
20.15.2 Adjust shadow
These functions add a shadow to drawing objects in the report.
The shadow properties can be adjusted in the catalog Shadow in the contextual tab Effect.
These functions are only available for the drawing objects text field, line/arrow, rectangle,
ellipse/circle and image.
Adjust shadow
Adjusts the shadow color.

Adjusts the vertical shadow offset.
Adjusts the horizontal shadow offset.
Adjusts the shadow blur.
Adjusts the shadow transparency.

Graphics
21 Graphics
21.1 Information about the graphics

As central element, the graphics is arranged in the middle of the visual field.
The machine, probe system, CAD model as well as all measured elements can be displayed in the graphics.
The graphics can be customized to the needs of any user due to the large amount of display and viewing
options.
The operation of the graphics window (rotate, move, zoom in/zoom out) with a 3D mouse is supported. The
button functions have to be configured in the control panel of the 3D mouse. Additional commands, as for
example zoom CAD model, insert intermediate point and so forth, can be assigned to the 3D mouse buttons
in the control panel.
21.2 Change graphics display

21.2.1 Change graphics settings
This function allows you to define the graphics display settings.
1. Activate the work window Graphics.

2. Activate the contextual tab Display.
3. Activate the work window Settings.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Graphics 422

Graphics
4. Adjust the settings to your needs.

5. The dialog can be scrolled using the scrollbar.
6. Click on OK.
Overview graphics settings

General
Display network grid * Displays/hides the network grid either as grid lines
or axis intercepts.
Scale grid size manually The screen width of the network grid can be entered
manually.
Intercept position If the network grid is displayed as axis intercepts,
X-Position the position of the coordinate system can be entered
in work piece coordinates.
Y-Position
Z-Position
Color of network grid Selection of the color of the network grid.
Display label symbol Displays/hides the symbols for the corresponding
element/feature in the labels.
Display label description Displays the description of the corresponding
element/feature in the labels.
Display deviation label Displays the deviations of the corresponding
elements in the element labels.
Only components that were evaluated and are listed
in the element window under tolerances and
deviations are displayed.
Label font size Adjusts the font size of the element or feature labels.
Adjust background color to color scheme Adjusts the background color of the work window to
the color scheme selected in the QUARTIS options
under Personalize.

Graphics
Color background Selection of the background color.

Perspective The representation of the model can be switched
between central and parallel. The central
perspective representation the model the way a user
sees it, this means space parallel edges unite in a
vanishing point.
* Function is also available on the contextual tab Graphics.
Model
Display CAD points enlarged with factor Point elements in the CAD model are displayed as
stars. The size of these stars can be enlarged with
the entered value. This simplifies the finding of
points in the CAD model.
Facets For the facets (triangle nets, which approximate
model surface) three different qualities
(fine/medium/rough) are available. Thus enabling
the user, for example, to use a fine model
representation in the report, though it needs a longer
time to be displayed; at the same time he can use a
coarse but faster view for measurement. The quality
of the display does not have influence on the
measuring results.
Save facets in facet file (*.saf) The calculated facets which are required for
graphical representation, can be saved in facet files
(*.SAF) and be available for subsequent recalls. This
reduces the loading time of the model.
Display CAD model coordinate system with axis Displays the coordinate system of the CAD model in
length the graphics. Further, the lengths of the coordinate
system axes can also be configured
Color of the CAD model coordinate system Adjusts the color of the CAD model coordinate
system.
Default color CAD model Adjust the default color of the CAD model.
Surface backside Color of surface backsides of CD models that were
converted with the option "Convert surface
orientation".
Default color boundaries in solid representation Adjust the default color of edges in the solid body
representation.
Color of selected elements Adjust the color of the selected element.
Color of auxiliary elements Adjusts the color of auxiliary elements.
Elemements
Display probe point symbols * Displays/hides the probe points in the graphics.
Probe points can either be displayed as spheres,
cubes or planes.
Display probe points with fixed dimensions If the option is not active, the points are drawn in a
way that they always have the same size on the
screen. This size does not change when zooming.

Graphics
The size is fix in pixel (about 10 pixel).

Color of probe points, residues and connection lines Adjusts the color of probe points, residues and
connection lines.
Color of point numbers Adjusts the color of the point numbers.
Connect probe points * Connects the probe points of the element in the left
element window.
Display deviation of probe points (residues) * Displays/hides the deviation vectors of the individual
probe points in relation to the calculated
compensating element in the graphics.
Fill tolerance zone with brightness [%] Defines the color brightness in % for the display of
the tolerance zones.
Magnification of deviation vectors * Input of the magnification of the deviation vectors of
the probe points.
Display min. / max. deviation The elements through the probe point with minimum
and the maximum deviation are drawn in additional
to the compensation element for the element in the
left element window. Further the min. / max. points
are drawn in as stars.
Color of the element in the left element window Adjusts the color of the element in the left element
window.
Color of the element in the right element window Adjusts the color of the element in the right element
window.
Define color spectrum manually The color spectrum shows the change in colors that
have been defined for the upper and lower limits.
The color spectrum corresponds to a flowing
transition of color tones defined for the upper and
lower limit. The color spectrum is used for the
flowing coloring of the points.
The color spectrum limits can be manually defined
when the option is active.
If the option is deactivated, the limits are
automatically determined with the maximal deviation
of the element. The maximal deviation corresponds
to the deviation of the min or max point to the
corresponding compensation element.
Upper color spectrum limit Adjust the upper color spectrum limit.
Lower color spectrum limit Adjust the lower color spectrum limit.
Color of the upper color spectrum limit Adjust the color of the upper color spectrum limit.
Color of the lower color spectrum limit Adjust the color of the lower color spectrum limit.
Invert color gradient of the color spectrum Inverts the color spectrum.
Display size of element from type point Defines the size of point elements.
Display size of non dimensional elements Defines the size for elements that are not limited by
probe points (e.g. theoretical elements).
Display work piece coordinate system with axis Displays/hides the work piece coordinate system
length with the defined axis length.

Graphics
Display element coordinate system with axis length Displays/hides the element coordinate system with
the defined axis length.
Motion paths
Display motion path directions * Displays/hides the motion paths.
Color of motion paths Adjusts the color of the motion paths.
Color of transfer paths Adjusts the color of transfer paths.
Color of probe points / scan paths Adjusts the color of probe points / scan paths.
Color of intermediate points Adjusts the color of intermediate points.
Color of probe head swivel range Adjusts the color of the probe head swivel range.
Display positioning movements in motion paths Displays/hides positioning movements in the motion
path.
Display measurement movements in motion paths Displays/hides measurement movements in the
motion path.
Display probe system change in motion paths Display/hides probe system changes in the motion
path.
Limit motion path display The number of displayed motion paths is limited to
this number. As soon as this number is exceeded,
the oldest motion path is continuously deleted and
replaced with the new one
Color of collision surfaces Adjusts the color of collision surfaces.
* Function is also available on the contextual tab Graphics
21.2.2 Display element graphics
This function displays the element in the left element window in the graphics work window.

3. Activate the work window Element graphics.

Graphics
Elements can be rotated and therefore be displayed in different views. If the element is reloaded in
the element window it is displayed in a meaningful view. A circle, for example, is displayed in axis
direction again.
The display functions of the ribbon offer a wide range of possibilities to customize the display to
one's needs. Further settings which can be useful for the element graphics can be found in the
settings dialog
21.2.3 Adjust model representation
This function adjusts the model display.

Model display
Solid (Surfaces are shaded from the inside as well as outside. The color depends on the graphics settings or the
imported data.)
Transparent (Shaded areas are painted transparently over one another. One thus can see through the model and
even recognize the parts that are located inside.)
Wire frame (Only the edges of the model are displayed. This mode is useful for viewing elements that are
normally hidden behind the front surfaces in display in real scale.)
Polygon (This mode is sometimes also called faceted. The polygons (facets) are displayed in addition to the wire
frame model and show the approximate flow of the surfaces.)

3. Click on the drop down Model and select the desired display.

Graphics
21.2.4 Adjust element representation
This function adjusts the element display.

Element display
Solid (Surfaces are shaded from the inside as well as outside. The color depends on the graphics settings or the
imported data.)
Wire frame (Only the edges of the model are displayed. This mode is useful for viewing elements that are
normally hidden behind the front surfaces in display in real scale.)
Polygon (This mode is sometimes also called faceted. The polygons (facets) are displayed in addition to the wire
frame model and show the approximate flow of the surfaces.)

3. Click on the drop down Element and select the desired display.
21.2.5 Display probe points
This function displays/hides the probe points in the graphics


Graphics
3. Click on the command button Display probe points.
21.2.6 Display probe point numbers
This function activates/deactivates the display of the probe point numbering. The number corresponds with
the point number in the database.
The numbers are drawn into the graphics according to their probing direction. Therefore one can recognize
in which direction they have been probed.

3. Click on the command button Display probe point numbers.
21.2.7 Display network grid
This function displays a network grid parallel to the axis.
The network grid can only be displayed when the element graphics is displayed parallel to a
coordinate axis.
The grid size and display mode can be set in the graphics settings.


Graphics
3. Click on the command button Display network grid.
21.2.8 Display element label
This function displays a label for each individual geometry element in the graphics. This label contains
element ID, description, symbol and deviation of the element below. The content as well as the font size of a
label can be defined in the graphics settings.
By clicking on an element label, the corresponding element is loaded into the left element window.
If a label hides another label, it is displayed with "+". Click the mouse and press the SHIFT key
simultaneously to move a visible label to the background bringing the hidden one to front.

3. Click on the command button Display element label.
21.2.9 Display feature label
This function displays a feature label for each individual geometry element in the graphics. This feature label
contains the features defined for this element.
If a feature is defined by two elements, they are connected with a line and the feature label is displayed in its
middle. The feature label contains feature ID, description and symbol of the feature. The content as well as
the font size of a label can be defined in the graphics settings.
If a label hides another label, it is displayed with "+". Click the mouse and press the SHIFT key
simultaneously to move a visible label to the background bringing the hidden one to front.

Graphics

3. Click on the command button Display feature label.
21.2.10 Colorize element in left element window with color spectrum
This function colorizes the element in the left element window with a defined color spectrum.
The lower and upper color spectrum limit can be set in the graphics settings.

3. Click on the command button Colorize element in left element window with color spectrum.
21.2.11 Display machine components
This function displays or hides the machine components (defined in the QUARTIS configuration program) in
the graphics.
The selection of which components are to be displayed is done in the display options.

Graphics

3. Click on the command button Display machine components.
21.2.12 Show display options
With the display options one can display / hide different components (machine components, CAD models,
elements) in the graphics.
It is also possible to position the work piece, manage CAD model layers, create graphics views and manage
intersections in the same dialog.

3. Click on the command button Show display options.

The CAD display options are displayed in the graphics.

Graphics
With a right click on the line Element types one can display or hide all element types with the
functions All on or All off with one click.
21.2.13 Position work piece
This function positions the work piece on the virtual CMM in the graphics window.
1. Display the display options.
2. Click on CAD Models with the right mouse button and select Position work piece.

Graphics
If this function is used for the first time, the coordinate system of the model is congruent with the
machine coordinate system. In order to place the work piece in the center of the measuring volume
the AUTO button can be used.
3. Define which CMM axis is set as primary direction.

Then select the axis of the CAD model is to be set parallel to the CMM axis.
This can either be carried out using the drop down or the mouse tool. The mouse tool is activated by
clicking on the mouse button. Then click a point or a surface on the CAD model. The clicked
direction will be set parallel to the corresponding CMM axis.
If a point or a surface is clicked with the mouse, a ">>>" is displayed in the CAD combo box. This
way the user knows that the direction was defined with a mouse click and is not a CAD axis.
4. Define the secondary direction the same way the primary direction was set.
5. By clicking on the X, Y or Z button next to Rotation, the work piece is rotated around the
corresponding CMM axis with the defined angle. The predefined angles can be selected in the drop
down field or the required angle can be entered directly into the field.
6. The Translation displays the displacement of the CAD model in relation to the CMM origin. The
CAD model can be displaced further by changing the X, Y and Z values in the measuring volume.
Basically there are two different ways to position a work piece on the measuring plate:
Position whole work piece
Using the big mouse tool a point on a surface of the CAD model and subsequently a point on the
measuring plate can be clicked. The CAD model is now moved to the measuring plate and the
clicked points are aligned with each other.
Position single axis
In order to position single axis on the measuring plate, the mouse tool which is located directly next
to the corresponding field of the axis is used. The procedure to position a single or two axes on the
measuring plate is the same as if one places the whole work piece on the measuring plate.
1. By clicking the AUTO button the CAD model is moved to the center of the CMM measuring volume.
2. Click on OK.

Graphics
By clicking on Delete the entered information is deleted and the CAD model is moved to the CMM
origin.
By clicking on Reset the rotation and translation is reset. All values are reset to the last saved
values.
21.2.14 Manage CAD model layer
All available layers of the CAD model are displayed in the display options.
Layers group certain elements of the CAD model.
The layer information is saved in the CAD model and is converted by the CAD converter into the ACIS format
used by Metrosoft QUARTIS.
Each model contains a standard layer. All elements that are not assigned to another layer are grouped in the
standard layer.
The layer functions are displayed below the main tree CAD Model.
Layer functions
Function name Function Available in
New Layer Adds a new layer to the selected CAD model CAD Model
On / Off The selected model or layer is activated or deactivated. CAD Model
Deactivated models or layers are not visible in the Standard layer
graphics and are con taken into consideration while Layer
measuring
Activate all layers All layers of the selected CAD model are activated. CAD Model
Activate only this The selected layer is activated while all other layers in the Standard layer
layer same model are deactivated. Layer
The action can be canceled with Activate all layers.
Assign elements The elements selected in the graphics are assigned to the Standard layer
selected layer. Layer
Mark elements The elements assigned to the selected layer are marked Standard layer
in the graphics. Layer
Change colors The colors of all elements assigned to the layer can be Standard layer
edited through a color selection window. Layer
Standard color The layer loses its color and the elements assigned to it Standard layer
are displayed in the standard color. Layer
The standard color of the standard layer corresponds to

Graphics
the model color defined in the graphics display settings.

With all other layers, the standard colors correspond to
the color of the standard layer.
Delete The layer is deleted and its elements are assigned to the Layer
standard layer
Rename Change the name of a layer. Layer
21.2.15 Display probe swivel range
This function displays the complete rotate and swivel range of the current articulating probe system.

3. Click on Display probe swivel range.
21.2.16 Connect probe points
This function connects the probe points of the element in the left element window.

3. Click on Connect probe points.

Graphics
21.2.17 Display deviation of probe points (residues)
This function displays the deviation vectors of individual probe points in relation to the calculated regression
element in the graphics.
The magnification of these deviation vectors can also be entered.

3. Click on Display deviation of probe points (residues).

Change, if needed, the magnification of the deviation vectors.
21.2.18 Display position deviations of elements
This function displays the position deviation of elements with arrows. The arrows always point from target to
actual element.
The position deviations in x, y, z, d, A and B are displayed as long as the components were evaluated and
are displayed in the element window under Tolerances and Deviations.
The magnification of the deviation vectors can also be entered.

3. Click on the command button Display position deviations of elements.

Adjust the magnification of the deviation vectors if needed.

Graphics
21.2.19 Display tolerance zone
This function allows displaying different tolerance zones for the elements circle and curve in the graphics.
The width of the tolerance zone (within tolerance) is controlled via the tolerances and deviation. The zones
outside upper tolerance and outside lower tolerance are displayed with half of the tolerance width.
A circle, respectively a curve with the color outside upper tolerance or outside lower tolerance (without
brightening) is drawn in at the tolerance limits. This line is completely positioned in the zone outside
upper/lower tolerance.
In the center of the tolerance zone (target value) a circle, respectively a curve with the color within upper
tolerance is drawn in.
For the circle the tolerance zones of the following feature types can be displayed graphically:
• Size
• Half Size
• Form
• Roundness.
For a curve the tolerance zone of a line profile can be displayed graphically.
The tolerance zones are only displayed for elements where the corresponding features have been
evaluated.

3. Click on Display tolerance zone.

4. Select the desired feature for which the tolerance zone should be displayed.
In case more than one feature exists for the selected element:

Graphics
5. Click on Select feature.

6. Select the desired feature.
The colors of the tolerance zones can be adjusted in the report settings in the QUARTIS options.
The selected colors are displayed with 60% brightness by default. The brightness can be adjusted
in the graphics settings under Elements.
21.2.20 Show mouse pointer coordinates
This function displays the coordinates of the mouse pointer on the CAD model.
The position of the display is defined by a mouse click.

3. Click on the command button Show mouse pointer coordinates.

4. Click on a position in the graphics where the display window is to be displayed. Move the mouse
pointer over the CAD model. The coordinates of the mouse pointer in relation to the CAD origin are
displayed in the window.
It is also possible to display the distance to a clicked point. Thus a distance measurement is
possible. With a click on the display window the coordinates are reset. With a second click on the
CAD model the starting point is drawn in. If the mouse pointer is now moved away from this point
the distance from the start point to the current position of the mouse pointer is displayed. With a
third click on the graphic a new start point is set. A right click terminates the distance
measurement but not the display of the mouse pointer coordinates. The coordinate system values
in the current PCS are displayed again.

Graphics
21.2.21 Display coordinate axes
This function displays an additional coordinate cross in the graphics.

The position is set by a mouse click.

3. Click on the command button Display coordinate axes.

4. Click on the position in the graphics where the coordinate cross is to be displayed.
21.2.22 Display color spectrum
This function displays the color spectrum with legend in the graphics.
The lower and upper color spectrum limit can be configured in the graphics settings
The position of the color spectrum is set by a mouse click.

3. Click on the command button Display color spectrum.

4. The position of the color spectrum in the graphics is defined by a mouse click

Graphics
21.2.23 Display recorded motion paths
This function displays or hides the recorded motion paths. Motion paths can be recorded with the function
Record motion paths.

3. Click on Connect probe points.
21.2.24 Record motion paths
This function records the motion path of the machine.

3. Click on Record motion paths.

Graphics
21.2.25 Delete recorded motion paths
This function deletes all recorded motion paths of the machine.

3. Click on the command button Delete recorded motion paths.
21.3 Change graphics view

21.3.1 Zoom all
This function fits all graphical elements into the graphics window.
After calling up this function all loaded graphics elements lie within the visible area.

3. Click on the command button Zoom all.

Graphics
21.3.2 Enlarge window area
This function zooms in on a selection which is defined by 2 screen positions (zoom window).
The selected are defines a new window area. The view is centered on the middle of the selected
area.

3. Click on the command button Zoom Window.
4. The first position is set by clicking on the left hand mouse button.
5. Bring the zoom rectangle to the desired size (pressing the left mouse key).On releasing the left
mouse key the second position is set and the selected area is enlarged.

Graphics
21.3.3 Zoom out
With this function the zoom is reduced by a determined factor.

3. Click on the command button Zoom out.
21.3.4 Zoom in
With this function the zoom is enlarged by a determined factor.

3. Click on the command button Zoom in.

Graphics
21.3.5 Display CAD model and elements
This function fits the whole CAD model in the graphics work window.

3. Click on the command button Zoom CAD model and elements.
21.3.6 Rotate, move and zoom view
This function rotates (hold left mouse button down and move mouse in desired direction), moves (hold CTRL
button down and move mouse in desired direction), reduces or enlarges (using the mouse wheel (if
available) or pressed CTRL button and moving the mouse in desired direction) the graphics using the
mouse.

3. Click on the command button Rotate, move and zoom view.

Graphics
21.3.7 Move view
This function moves, reduces or enlarges (using the mouse wheel (if available) or pressed CTRL button and moving
the mouse in desired direction) the graphics using the mouse wheel (if available) or by pressing the CTRL
button and moving the mouse in desired direction.

3. Click on the command button Move view.

Position the graphics on the desired position.
21.3.8 Back to the last view
This function recalls the last used graphics views.

3. Click on the command button Back to the last view.

Graphics
21.3.9 Continue to next view
This function sequential undo's the changes made with Back to the last view.

3. Click on the command button Continue to next view.
21.3.10 Display view perpendicular to element
By clicking on a CAD surface or an element, the view is rotated perpendicular to the normal of the selected
point.

3. Click on the command button View perpendicular to element.

Graphics
4. Click on the desired position on the CAD model.
21.3.11 Split graphics view
This function splits the graphic window in 4 separated windows. It is possible to define and customize these
4 views independently.

3. Click on the command button Split graphics view.

Graphics
21.3.12 Define rotation angle
This function defines a rotation angle with which the graphics view can be rotated around the screen axes.

3. Click on the command button Rotation angle.

Select the desired rotation angle or enter the value directly into the field.
21.3.13 Rotate view around horizontal screen axis
This function rotates the graphics around the monitor horizontal (monitor X axis).
The rotation angle can be defined.

3. Click on the command button Rotate view around horizontal screen axis.
If the CTRL button is pressed down at the same time, the graphics view is rotated in reversed
direction.

Graphics
21.3.14 Rotate view around vertical screen axis
This function rotates the graphics around the monitor vertical (monitor Y axis).

3. Click on the command button Rotate view around vertical screen axis.
direction.
21.3.15 Rotate view around screen normal
This function rotates the graphics around the monitor normal (monitor Z axis).

3. Click on the command button Rotate view around vertical screen axis.
direction.

Graphics
21.3.16 Load standard views
This function loads a standard view into the graphics window.

3. Click on the command button Load standard views.
The following standard views are available:

Graphics
21.3.17 Create user view
This function allows you to create user defined graphics views.
1. Display the display options window.
2. Open the context menu with a right click on Views and select New and enter a name for the
graphics views
21.3.18 Delete user view
This function deletes user defined graphics views.
2. Select the view to be deleted.

3. Open the context menu with a right click and select the menu entry Delete.
21.3.19 Rename user view
This function renames user views.

Graphics
2. Select the view to be renamed.

3. Open the context menu with a right click and select the menu entry Rename.
Enter the new name for the user view.
21.3.20 Load user view
This function allows you to load user defined graphics view.
A user graphics view can also be loaded using the context menu in display options.

2. Activate the contextual tab Graphics.
3. Click on the command button Load user view.

Select the user view.
In order to load a different user view, open the drop down list by clicking on and select the desired
view.
21.3.21 Save user view
This function allows you to save your own graphics views.

Graphics
2. Select the view to be saved.

3. Open the context menu with the right click and select the entry Save.
21.4 Create and manage intersections

21.4.1 Create and load intersections
These functions create and load intersections in the CAD model.

They are not displayed in the element graphics mode.

3. Create or load intersections with these functions.

Intersections can be managed in the display options.
Create and load intersections

Click intersection on model.
The mouse tool allows you to click a point on the CAD model with the left mouse button
and then to confirm this point with the right mouse button. The model is intersected at the
section plane that runs through the clicked point and has the same normal direction as
the clicked point
If an edge is selected, the direction of the edge is relevant for the direction of the section
plane and not the normal direction of the point. Thus one can easily display the cross
section of a curved profile without constructing any additional planes.

Graphics
Parts of the model that are positioned in front of the section plane from the user's point of
view are removed.
Select intersection plane.
Coordinate planes and measure or constructed planes from the current measurement can
be selected. The model is intersected at the selected plane.
Activate intersection.
This function activates or deactivates an intersection. The function is automatically
activated when an intersection is selected with the mouse tool or via the drop down.
Invert intersection.
This function inverts the intersection.
Enter offset.
This function moves the intersection plane with the entered offset.
Load
Load intersection.
This function loads saved intersections. The intersections can be saved in the
intersection management.
21.4.2 Manage intersections
This function allows you to manage intersections.

1. Display the display options.
2. The current intersection can be saved by clicking on Intersections with the right mouse button.
3. By clicking on an existing intersection with the right mouse button, it can be deleted, renamed,
loaded or saved (in doing so, the selected intersection is overwritten with the currently active intersection).
Intersections can be created and loaded in the graphics ribbon.

Graphics
21.5 Select elements

21.5.1 Select elements
This function selects elements on the CAD model.

Multiple selection is possible using the CTRL button.

3. Click on Select elements.
4. Select the desired elements by clicking on the corresponding surface.
21.5.2 Cancel selection
This function cancels the selection of elements that have been selected using the function Select elements.

Graphics

3. Click on Cancel selection.

The selection of the elements is canceled.
21.5.3 Fade selected elements out

This function hides all elements that have been selected using the function Select elements.
Execute the function Select elements before using this function. The hidden elements are not
deleted. They can be displayed again using the function Show all elements.

3. Click on Fade selected elements out.

The selected elements are hidden.

Graphics
21.5.4 Show all elements
This function displays all hidden elements again.

3. Click on Show all elements.

All hidden elements are displayed again.
21.5.5 Invert selection
This function inverts the selection made using the function Select elements.
Thus all previously not selected elements will be selected.
Execute the function Select elements prior to this function.

3. Click on Invert selection.

All not selected elements are selected.

Graphics
21.6 Insert auxiliary elements

21.6.1 Insert curve
This function allows you to create a curve. These curves can then be used as nominal curves for the curve
measurement.
Curves are created with an intersection between an imported CAD model (previously imported) and a plane
that has to be defined.
Created curves are saved in an auxiliary file with the file extension .SAX and linked with the work piece. The
linkage is display in the database work window under Graphics / Models.

2. Activate the contextual tab Edit.
3. Click on Insert curve.
4. Define an intersection plane.

The intersection plane can either be clicked with the mouse tool, selected in the drop down filed or
entered manually in the input fields x, y, z, i, j and k.
5. Confirm the input of the intersection plane in case you entered the values manually.
6. It is possible to enter an offset to the defines intersection plane.
7. Select the desired number of intersection planes.
8. Enter the distance between the individual intersection planes in case you entered more than one
intersection plane.
9. Click on Insert.
Curves can be limited to certain surfaces on the model:

• Hide surfaces – curves are created only on the displayed model surfaces
• Select surfaces – curves are only created on the selected surfaces if a selection is active

Graphics
21.7 Mirror CAD model

This function allows mirroring CAD models.

3. Click on Mirror CAD model.
4. Define a mirror plane on which the CAD model is to be mirrored on.

5. Define the storage location where the mirrored models are to be saved to.
6. Define a name for the assembly group file (an assembly file receives the file extension *.sag). An
assembly group file receives the file extension ".sag.
If an assembly file with the same name already exists at the chosen storage location, the file will be
marked in red.
If the assembly group file (.sag) is imported into the current or another work piece subsequently to
mirroring, all mirrored CAD models are imported at the same time. Thus the mirrored models do
not have to be selected and imported individually.
By importing the assembly file, one also ensures that the CAD models have the same reference
ID's as in the non-mirrored assembly. This is important for running mirrored programs because
certain program sentences reference to the CAD model.
7. Define the names for the mirrored CAD models by clicking directly on it on the list. The suggested
name is combines the name of the un-mirrored CAD model and the selected mirror plane. If a file
with the same name already exists in the defined storage location, the corresponding file is marked
in the list.
If a file with the same name already exists at the chosen storage location, the file will be marked in
red.
8. Click on Mirror.

Graphics
The assembly file and the mirrored CAD models are saved in the defined storage location. They are
not automatically imported and therefore not yet visible in the graphics. The CAD models can be
imported into any work piece.
21.8 Edit graphics

21.8.1 Select elements
This function selects elements on the CAD model.

Multiple selection is possible using the CTRL button.

3. Click on Select elements.
4. Select the desired elements by clicking on the corresponding surface.

Graphics
21.8.2 Cancel selection

This function cancels the selection of elements that have been selected using the function Select elements..

3. Click on Cancel selection.

The selection of the elements is canceled.
21.8.3 Invert selection

This function inverts the selection made using the function Select elements.
Thus all previously not selected elements will be selected.

3. Click on Invert selection.

All not selected elements are selected.

Graphics
21.8.4 Delete selected elements
This function deletes all elements that have been selected using the function Select elements.
If CAD models were selected, the selected elements are deleted from the CAD model. The CAD model can
then be saved.
If geometry elements were selected, the selected elements are deleted from the database.

3. Click on Delete selected elements.

All selected elements are deleted.

22 Quick Selection Table
22.1 Information about the quick selection table

Programs can be started fast and easily with one button click on the quick selection table. This can be done
across several databases, i.e. the required database/program does not have to be loaded previously.
Using the batch processing several programs can selected, which are then executed automatically one after
the other, without having the user start each program individually.
22.2 Create new quick selection table

This function creates a new quick selection table.

2. Click on New.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Quick Selection Table 464

4. Enter a short description for the quick selection table.

5. Select if the quick selection table should contain 4, 9 or 12 buttons.
6. If a Homepage is created, check the corresponding checkbox.
The homepage can be directly opened using the function Call homepage.
Only one table can be configured as homepage.

If a new table is selected as homepage, the old table loses this status.
7. Click on OK.

22.3 Open quick selection table

This function opens an existing quick selection table from the active system database.

2. Click on Open.
4. Select the desired quick selection table.
The selected quick selection table can be defined as homepage in the dialog.
Only one table can be defined as homepage; thus an already existing homepage loses its status.

22.4 Show quick access for program start

This function displays the Quick Selection Table window in the workspace.

4. The Quick Selection Table window is now displayed in the workspace.
In case no quick selection table has been defined yet, an empty work window is opened.
22.5 Edit buttons

22.5.1 Configure button
With this function a button on the quick selection table is configured.
1. Activate the work window Quick Selection Table.

2. Activate the contextual tab Quick Selection Table.

3. Select the desired button on the quick selection table.
4. Click on the command button Configure.

This function can also be called by a right mouse click on a button.
5. Select the function to be executed by the button.

• Execute program (a program is executed by clicking on the button)
• Call homepage (the quick selection table that is defined as homepage is displayed by clicking on the
button)
• Jump to previous page (the previous quick selection table is displayed by clicking on the button)
• Open quick selection table (a quick selection table is loaded by clicking on the button).
6. Define if a text or image is to be displayed on the button.

7. Change to the tab Parameter.
The tab Parameter is only available for the functions Execute program and Open quick
selection table. If the function Open quick selection table is selected, one can select the
desired quick selection table in the tab Parameter.
8. Select an existing work piece in the drop down menu ( ) or in the selection dialog ( ).
9. Select the program to be executed (or the quick selection table to be opened) in the drop down
menu ( ) or in the selection dialog ( )
10. Select the execution mode.
• New measurement (the program is executed in a new measurement, otherwise the current
measurement is always overwritten)
• Query user defined properties (before the program is started, the user defined properties are
queried. If several program are executed one after the other using batch processing, the user defined
properties are queried directly on after the other when activating the quick selection button in order to
subsequently allow an automatic execution of the programs)

11. Change to the tab Text.

12. Enter the text you want to be displayed.
The text can be centered by activating the corresponding checkbox.
It is also possible to change the font size.
13. Change to the tab Image.

14. Select the image file.
It is also possible to select an audio or video file which will be played on the quick selection table.
The following formats are supported:
• Graphics: *.bmp, *.gif *.ico, *.jpg, *.jpeg, *.wmf, *.png
• Audio: *.wma, *.mid *.mp3, *.mi, *.wav
• Video: *.avi, *.wmv, *.mpeg, *.mpg
15. Select if the image should be stretched (image is stretched to button size) or scaled (the proportions of the
image are kept).
16. Click on OK.

22.5.2 Delete button
This function deletes the configuration of the current active button.

3. Select the button to be deleted.


22.6 Use the batch mode

22.6.1 Activate/deactivate batch mode recording
The batch mode enables several programs, which are configured on different buttons, to be executed in
succession automatically.
Therefore the sequence of key strokes is recorded.


4. Click on the desired buttons while the batch mode is activated.

The sequence of these key strokes is automatically recorded.
The batch mode is deactivated by clicking once more on the command button Record. However,
the sequence of the key strokes is kept.
22.6.2 Execute batch mode
This function executes the saved key strokes as a batch.

Before the batch is executed, a window appears with a list of the stored programs.
The user can use this either to confirm the execution or to abort the batch processing.



4. Before the batch is executed, a dialog is displayed that contains a list of all saved programs that are
going to be executed.
5. Click on OK.
The batch is executed.
If during a batch processing a new work piece is loaded, then Measurement 1 is automatically
selected. In certain circumstances it can be overwritten.
To avoid this, the option New measurement has to be activated under Parameter while
configuring the button. In doing so a new measurement is created when a new work piece is
loaded

22.6.3 Delete batch mode
This function deletes the saved sequence of key strokes (batch).


22.7 Change view

22.7.1 Call homepage
This function calls the quick selection that has been defined as homepage.
An existing quick selection table can be defined as homepage with the function Load quick selection table.

3. Click on the command button Homepage.


22.7.2 Jump to previous page
This function calls the previous (if available) quick selection table.
It is possible to go back through several quick selection tables.

3. Click on the command button Back.

22.7.3 Activate/deactivate text display
This function switches all buttons of the quick selection table to text display (if text is available).

3. Click on the command button Text display.

By clicking once again on the button Text Display, the configured display is restored.

22.7.4 Close quick selection table window
This function closes the work window Quick Selection Table.


Statistics
23 Statistics
23.1 Information about the statistics

Metrosoft QUARTIS offers a wide range of functions for the statistical evaluation of characteristics.
The trend diagram displays the actual values over all measurements and allows an evaluation of the
production processes. All actual values are classified into a selectable amount of classes and displayed in
the histogram. The data page displays all statistical relevant data in one view. Statistical functions for
process controlling are integrated with the SPC ruling charts for mean value, range and standard deviation
as well as with the flexible random sampling scope.
In connection with a superior quality system Metrosoft QUARTIS additionally offers the possibility to export
the statistics data into the Q-DAS format.
23.2 Mathematical fundamentals of statistics

The statistical evaluation integrated in QUARTIS is based on M4 according to DIN 55319 [N5]. The formulas
used are defined as follows.
• Concept definitions
• Capability indexes
• Sample size
23.2.1 Concept definitions
Symbol Description Formula

USL = nominal value + upper
USL Upper specification limit
tolerance
LSL = nominal value + lower
LSL Lower specification limit
tolerance
Current measured value
n Sample size (population if m=1)
m Amount of samples
Arithmetic population mean value
Standard population deviation
Process mean value

(mean value of mean values of individual samples)
Variances of individual samples
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Statistics 477

Statistics
Estimated value of standard deviation

(mean value of the individual sample variances)
23.2.2 Capability indexes
Cm Machine capability (machine performance)

Cmk Machine capability taking into account the position of the mean value
Pp Temporary process performance (process performance)
Ppk Temporary process performance taking into account the position of the mean value
Cp Process capability (process capacity)
Cpk Process capability taking into account the position of the mean value
Process capability [Cp/ Cpk] and process performance [Pp / Ppk] (depending on samples)
Machine capability (independent from samples)
Capability indexes of unilateral upwards tolerated features

Statistics
Estimators of position and scattering
The scattering range limits are dependent on the model distribution.

For features with a "natural boundary" at zero, the folded normal distribution or Rayleigh distribution is used.
The classification which distribution method is used depends on the physical properties of the feature.
The formulas used to estimate the scattering range limits (Quantile) Q99.865% and Q0.135% for the
folded normal distribution/Rayleigh distribution are derived from the group standard VW 10130.
Model distribution: Normal distribution

Machine capability [Cm / Cmk]
Calculation method:
Process capability [Cp / Cpk] and temporary process capability [Pp / Ppk]
Calculation
method:

Statistics
Model distribution: Folded normal distribution

applies to the following features: Straightness, Flatness, Roundness, Cylindricity, Line profile, Surface profile,
Parallelism, Perpendicularity, Angularity, Symmetry and Form deviation.
Calculation method:

Statistics
Calculation
method:

Statistics
Model distribution: Rayleigh distribution

applies to the following features: Position, Coaxiality / Concentricity, Runout, Axial runout, Position d
and Position B (unilateral)
Calculation method:

Statistics
Calculation method:

Statistics
23.2.3 Sample size
This field defines how many single values are to be combined into a sample.
A machine capability evaluation automatically leads to a sample size of 1.
A process capability required a sample size of 2 or more.
The assignment of an actual value to a sample is carried out due to the measurement number.
Measurement 1 is always taken as start value. If an actual value is missing or it was removed by
the actual value filter, the corresponding sample contains less values. Samples with less than two
values are ignored.
Example:
Sample size = 5 Actual values of measurement 1..5 = sample 1
Actual values of measurement 6..10 = sample 2
etc.
23.3 Statistical evaluation of features

This function displays the Statistics window in the workspace.

4. The Statistics window is displayed in the workspace.

Statistics
23.4 Adjust the statistical evaluation

23.4.1 Adjust filter settings
This function selects which features and which measurements, respectively which actual values are to be
considered to the statistical evaluation.
1. Activate the work window Statistics.

2. Activate the contextual tab Statistics.
3. Click on the command button Filter.
4. The features to be filtered can be selected in the tab Feature Filter.

5. Select if the features to be filtered are limited via a manual selection. All selected features are
displayed in the statistics.
6. Select if the features to be filtered is limited via a feature deviation.
Features with a deviation out of
Only features are displayed that have a deviation out of the defined range.

Statistics
Features with deviation within

Only features are displayed that have a deviation within the defined range.
7. Select if the features without tolerance zone are ignored (all features with no tolerance zone are not
displayed in the statistics).
8. Switch to the tab Actual value filter. There are three criteria's for the filtering of the actual values
available. These filters can be combined.
In doing so, an actual value has to meet the defined criteria's in order to be taken over into the
evaluation.
9. Select if the actual value filter is activated. The actual value filter is deactivated by default. This
means all measuring values are evaluated.
10. Select if the single values are filtered based on their affiliation with a measurement. Optional a
measurement selection (the sequence of the measurement selection is taken into consideration in the trend
diagram), a measurement range (from ... to) (when the dialog is called for the first time or after a work piece
change, the suggested measurement range reaches over all measurements existing in the work piece,
extended by the measurement range that contains actual values for the first feature) or a selection of the last
measurement (N) (the last actual value (K = largest measurement number) of each individual feature is used
as basis. Therefore the range reaches from the measurement (K-N+1) to K) can be done.
11. Select if single values are to be filtered over a defined time interval (the range is initialized with the
measurements existing in the work piece. As actual values of features remain even without the original
measurement and are useable, it might be necessary to extend the range manually).
12. Select if single values are to be filtered over a quality range. The percentage value refers to the total
utilization of the tolerance.
13. Click on OK.

Statistics
23.4.2 Select evaluation method
With this function the evaluation method for the statistics can be selected.
Statistical evaluations can be done for various capability indices.
The following methods are available:
Evaluation method
Machine capability Cm/Cm
Preliminary process capability Pp/PpK
Process capability Cp/Cpk

3. Click below method of evaluation on and select the desired method of evaluation.
23.4.3 Change random sample scope
This function defines how many individual values are to be grouped for a random sample scope.
A machine capability evaluation (Cm\Cmk) automatically leads to a random sample scope of 1, a

process capability evaluation requires a random scope sample of at least 2.

Statistics
3. Click on the command button Random sample scope and adjust the default values using .
23.5 Display diagramsAdjust diagram settings

This function allows you to adjust the settings of the statistical diagrams.

4. Set the desired settings.

5. Click on OK.

Statistics
The following settings are available:
Overview
Select which diagrams are to be displayed on what position on the overall view.
View
The trend diagram can be displayed as bar or line diagram. Furthermore the histogram classes and the
action limits for the view can be defined.
Auxiliary lines
Select which auxiliary lines are to be drawn into the statistical diagrams.
Text output
Select what additional text is to be displayed above the statistical diagrams.
Minimum and maximum values, as well as the number of features outside the tolerance are always
displayed.
Statistics overview
Settings for the statistics overview can be set here.
It is possible to select the number of features which are to be displayed in the window as well as the
maximum range of values. Furthermore the network grid can also be displayed.
23.5.1 Change limits
Depending on the evaluation method, the limits for the corresponding capability index can be entered with
this function.
A feature within these limits (larger or equal limit) is displayed in green in the feature overview. If the feature
is outside of these limits (smaller than limit) it is displayed in red.
The outside bar represents the capability index Cm, Pp or Cp, the inner bar represents the capability index
Cmk, Ppk or Cpk.

3. Enter the desired values for the limits directly into the input fields below Limits.

Statistics
23.5.2 Change diagram limits
This function allows you to adjust the diagram range of the perpendicular axis (ordinate) for the trend
diagram, histogram and x bar chart.
Diagram options
Dispersion of the process The diagram covers the range from Q99.865% - Q0.135%.
Min..Max The diagram covers the range between the minimum and maximum feature.
Band The diagram covers the same range for all features around the entered
target value.
The range can be defined in the input fields below.
Tolerance zone The diagram covers the whole tolerance zone.
Action limits The diagram covers the action limits.
The action limits can be defined in the statistics settings.

3. Select the desired option using and adjust the values of the field below if needed.

Statistics
23.5.3 Display overview
On the tab Overall view 3 diagrams can be displayed. Thus the most important diagrams can be displayed
directly in one tab.
The diagrams to be displayed in the overall view can be defined in the diagram settings.
23.5.4 Display data page
On the data page information for the selected feature such as part data, feature data and statistic data is
displayed.
The output of the capability index depends on the selected evaluation method.

Statistics
23.5.5 Display trend diagram
The trend chart is displayed for the selected feature.

This chart is based on individual values; sampling schemes are not taken into account.
The trend diagram displays the sequence of the actual values over the evaluated measurements
You can choose between a linear regression or a bar chart as presentation format in the diagram settings
Line diagram
Bar diagram

Statistics
23.5.6 Display histogram
The histogram is displayed for the selected feature.

This diagram is based on individual values; sampling schemes are not taken into account.
The histogram shows the distribution of the actual values around a mean value. The individual values are
grouped in a configurable number of classes which can be defined in the statistics settings.
The length of the bar is an indicator of the frequency of the values within this class.
In a normal distribution of values, the theoretical distribution function is drawn in red (Gaussian curve).
The theoretical distribution functions Folded normal distribution or Rayleigh distribution are displayed for
features with "natural limits" at zero.

Statistics
23.5.7 Display X bar chart
The x-bar process control chart is displayed for the selected feature as long process capability (Cp/Cpk) or
preliminary process capability (Pp/Ppk) is selected as evaluation method.
This control chart is based on the sampling scheme.
This diagram is mainly examined along with the R or S process control chart.
The amount of values which were selected in the random sampling scope is located within a bar. The length
of the bar indicates where the minimal and maximal value of this random sample is located. Furthermore a
blue square displays the mean value of the random sampling scope.
23.5.8 Display R card
The R process control card is displayed for the selected feature as long process capability (Cp/Cpk) or
This control chart is based on the sampling scheme.
Each value indicates the range (R) from a random sampling scope.

Statistics
23.5.9 Display s card
The S process control chart is displayed for the selected feature as long process capability (Cp/Cpk) or
This control card is based on the sampling scheme. Each value indicates the standard deviation of a random
sample scope.

Statistics
23.5.10 Export diagram
This function exports a diagram as *.wmf file (image).
2. Select the desired diagram.

3. Open the context menu with the right mouse button and select the entry Export diagram.
Select saving position and file name in the displayed dialog.

Statistics
23.5.11 Copy diagram
This function copies a diagram into the Windows clipboard.

3. Open the context menu with the right mouse button and select the entry Copy diagram.
The diagram can only be copied from the Windows clipboard into an external program (e.g. Word).

Statistics
23.5.12 Print diagram
This function prints the diagram.

3. Open the context menu with the right mouse button and select the entry Print overview.

Statistics
23.6 Change view

23.6.1 Refresh statistics
This function refreshes the whole statistics.

This is needed when new features were added or features were deleted.

3. Click on the command button Refresh.
23.6.2 Close statistics window
This function closes the work window Statistics.


Statistics
23.7 Export features in Q-DAS format

This function exports features from the database into a Q-DAS file.
The data then can be imported and evaluated with the statistics package QS-STAT from the company Q-
DAS

2. Click on Export.
3. Click on Q-DAS data.

Statistics
4. Select the features to be exported. If all features are to be exported, the checkbox Always all
features can be activated.
5. Select the Q-DAS key file (in this file the Q-DAS fields to be exported are configured).
This key file (Q-DAS field configuration) can be customized with the button.
6. Adjust, if needed, the storage position and file name of the Q-DAS file.
from the database.
One can choose between *.dfq format (description and values in one file) or *.dfd, *.dfx format
(description and values in two files) for the export.
7. Define if all measurements or only the current measurement are exported.
If only the current measurement is exported, the following additional options can be selected: attach
to file (the data is attached to the selected Q-DAS file), new file (a new file with the same name and next
measurement number is created) or overwrite file (the selected Q-DAS file is overwritten with the new values).
8. Select the export format (compressed/uncompressed) and the K0002 attribute with missing
measurement values. If the attribute 255 (measurement allocation remains) is selected, the gaps
with missing measurement values are not filled. If the attribute 256 (Measurement allocation does
not remain) is selected, the gaps with missing measurement values are filed with the next following
measurement values.
9. Click on OK.

Feature Data
24 Feature Data
24.1 Display Feature Data

With this function the feature data window is displayed in the work window.

3. Click on Feature Data.
4. The Feature Data window is displayed in the workspace.
24.2 Record feature data

With this function features, which are created subsequently, can be displayed directly in the work window.
Thus a control of the features is possible without creating a report.
Make sure that the work window Feature Data is displayed in the workspace.
1. Activate the work window Feature Data.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Feature Data 502

Feature Data
2. Activate the contextual tab Feature Data.

As long as this command button is activated all features which are evaluated using the tab sheet
Evaluate, are now recorded.
As soon as the command button is deactivated, no more features will be recorded.
24.3 Delete feature data

This function deletes recorded feature data in the feature data window.
Make sure that the work window Feature Data is displayed in the workspace.


All recorded feature data is deleted from the feature data window.
24.4 Close feature data window
This function closes the work window Feature Data.

Feature Data


The work window is closed but the recorded features will not be deleted.
The recorded features are displayed again as soon as the work window is opened again.

Offline
25 Offline
25.1 Virtual joystick, click probe point on CAD model and simulation
speed
The machine can be operated in offline mode using the virtual joystick.
These functions are only displayed if Metrosoft QUARTIS is in offline mode (not connected to the
machine).
1. Virtual joystick
2. Click probe point on CAD model
3. Simulation speed
Virtual joystick
The virtual joystick can be operated in several different ways.
Clicking in axis direction
The clicked axis direction (arrow) is colorized yellow.
One click moves the machine 1mm. If the Ctrl-key is pressed at the same time, the machine is moved 0.1
mm. If the Shift-key is pressed at the same time, the machine moves 10 mm.
Positioning in X, Y or Z direction
Position the mouse pointer on the middle button of the virtual joystick.
Depending on the position of the mouse pointer on the button, the X and Y or the Z direction is blended out.
Now draw the virtual joystick in the desired direction by holding down the left mouse button and moving the
mouse in the corresponding direction.
The speed can be set with the slider on the right side.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Offline 505

Offline
The current position of the machine is displayed in the coordinate display below the virtual
joystick.
Click probe point on CAD model

If this command button is activated one can adopt a measuring point directly from the CAD model by clicking
on it.
Simulation speed
The speed of the machine can be set with the slider.
25.2 Simulation of a program process

In order to simulate a running program, a scattering distribution for the element probe points can be entered.
If the machine should be operated in real-time, the slide control next to the joystick has to be set to 1.0.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Offline 506

General dialogs
26 General dialogs
26.1 Expression Editor

The expression editor can be called in different locations in Metrosoft QUARTIS.
The predefined expressions (variables) in Metrosoft QUARTIS or system information can be output via the
expression editor. Furthermore it is possible to output and calculate element data with the help of functions.
1. The variable can be inserted into the field on the top right with a double click
2. If multiple expressions should be inserted each after the other, a + has to be inserted in between
them.
If regular text should be entered, it has to be set between apostrophes '.....'.
3. The field Result displays how the expression (e.g. in a text field) will be output.
4. In the field Description a description of the variable marked in the left part of the editor is displayed.
.
The result must be of a defined data type. If this is not the case, a corresponding hint is displayed
in the result field. The required data type depends on where the expression is used. In a report
text field for example, the result can contain letters. However, if a nominal value is calculated in a
n expression, the result can only contain numbers.
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 General dialogs 507

General dialogs
26.1.1 Output element values

Depending on where the editor is opened, this tab may not be available.
2. Select the element of which you want to output the value.
3. Select the desired element component with double click. The expression is now inserted in the right
field. The value of the expression is displayed in the result field.
26.1.2 Offset element values against each other

2. Select a element component.

General dialogs
3. Enter an arithmetic operation sign.

4. Select another element component.
26.1.3 Using functions
1. Switch to the tab Functions.

2. Select the function category.
3. Select the desired function with a double click. The expression is inserted into the input field.
If a function is selected on the left side, a description of this function is displayed in the description
field.
4. Enter the function values in the input field.

This can either be done manually or via the selection of element components according to step 2 to
4.
The function values have to be separated with a comma. After the last function value a closing
parenthesis has to be entered in order to complete the function.
The code completion supports the user with the manual input of functions. Type the first letter of
the desired function and then the command and space key (Ctrl + Space). Now a list of relevant
functions including parameter list is displayed.
5. Click on OK.

General dialogs
26.2 Direction dialog
The direction dialog is an auxiliary dialog box which allows you to enter directions in different ways
Direction dialog
Selects the direction of the element in the left element window
Selects the direction of the element in the right element window.
Selects the XY, YZ or ZKX plane as direction.
Selects the attitude from 2 respectively 3 points. Those coordinates are taken
over in the following dialog.
Manual input in a Cartesian coordinate system (direction in x, y and z).
Manual input of the direction in a spherical coordinate system (polar) by
specifying the angle of rotation (ax) and the inclination angle (bxy).
Manual input of the direction in a cylindrical coordinate system (polar) by
specifying the angle of rotation (ax) and the height (h).
Direction selection from the element data in the database
Manual input of values. Entered values can be inverted by clicking on .

General dialogs
26.3 Position dialog
The position dialog is an auxiliary dialog which allows you to enter a position in many different ways.
Position dialog
Selects the position of the element in the left element window.
Selects the position of the element in the right element window.
Selection of the position of an element in the database.
Manual input in a Cartesian coordinate system (x, y, and z position).

Manual input of the position in a spherical coordinate system (polar) by
specifying the angle of rotation (ax) and the inclination angle (bxy).
Manual input of the position in a cylindrical coordinate system (polar) by
specifying the angle of rotation (ax) and the height (h).
Manual input of values

Keyboard shortcuts
27 Keyboard shortcuts
The following table shows all shortcuts in Metrosoft QUARTIS.

For keyboard shortcuts in which you press two or more keys simultaneously, the keys to press are separated
by a plus sign (+)
General
Shortcut HT 400 function key QUARTIS function
F1 Open QUARTIS help
Ctrl+A Select all
Ctrl+C Copy
Ctrl+V Insert
Ctrl+X Cut
Ctrl+Y Redo
Ctrl+Z Undo
Del Delete
F1 Confirm dialog / ribbon (next or abort)
Start measuring sequence
F10 Abort dialog / ribbon
Graphics
Ctrl+Alt+A Zoom all

Ctrl+Alt+C Display machine components
Ctrl+Alt+E Display element label
Ctrl+Alt+H Display feature label
Ctrl+Alt+L Back to the last view
Ctrl+Alt+N Continue to next view
Ctrl+Alt+O Show display options
Ctrl+Alt+P Display probe points
Ctrl+Alt+R Display probe swivel range
Ctrl+Alt+W Zoom Window
Shift+Ctrl+A Zoom CAD model and elements
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Keyboard shortcuts 512

Keyboard shortcuts
Machine
Shift+Ctrl+P Position machine
Probe system
Shift+Ctrl+C Calibrate probe system
Shift+Ctrl+L Load probe system
Shift+Ctrl+S Save probe system
Shift+Ctrl+1 Switch to stylus 1

Shift+Ctrl+H Swivel and rotate articulating probing
system
F9 Swivel with joystick (only PHS1)
Measure
F2 F2 Accept measuring point from current

machine position
F3 F3 Delete last measuring or intermediate point
F4 F4 Accept intermediate point from current
machine position
F5 F5 Terminate measurement and save element
Program
F7, F12 F12 Stop program
F8 Execute program in single step mode
F12 F12 Pause program
Ctrl+E Export programs
Ctrl+I Import or link programs

Keyboard shortcuts
Ctrl+O Open program

Ctrl+S Save active program
Ctrl+F4 Close program
Ctrl+F5 F6 Execute program
Continue program
Backspace Delete backwards

Index
Index
STEP Converter ................................................. 119

User format Converter......................................... 121
A VDA Converter ................................................... 120
ACIS Calculate user specific feature ................................ 355
export .................................................................. 50 Calculation methods
Adjust DIN 1688 tolerances.....................................335 2D ...................................................................... 233

Chebychev ......................................................... 230
Adjust DIN 16901 tolerances...................................334 Least squares (Gauss) ........................................ 229
Maximum inscribed ............................................. 232
Adjust ISO 2768 tolerances.....................................329
Minimum circumscribed ...................................... 231
Adjust the quick access toolbar ................................ 61 Move to nominal point ......................................... 228
Perpendicular ..................................................... 233
Align/Coordinate system .........................................291 Standard ............................................................ 227
Articulating probing system .....................................199 Tangential inside................................................. 233
Tangential outside .............................................. 232
Calibrate.............................................................201 X-, Y-, X-axis ...................................................... 227
Change articulating probing system settings ........199
Information .........................................................199 Calibrate
Rotate ................................................................200 Calibrate articulating probing system PH10.......... 201
Calibrate articulating probing system PHS1 ......... 204
Probe system ..................................................... 177
B Reference sphere ............................................... 197
Stylus changing system ...................................... 210
Batch Calibrate articulating probing system PH10 ............. 201
delete .................................................................475 Calibrate articulating probing system PHS1 ............. 204
execute ..............................................................473
off.......................................................................473 Calibrate probe system for PHS1 ............................ 181
on.......................................................................473
Capability indexes .................................................. 479
Use the batch mode ............................................473
Change graphics display
Bestfit.....................................................................299
Adjust element representation ............................. 429
Adjust model representation ................................ 428
C Change graphics settings .................................... 423
Colorize element in left element window with color
spectrum ........................................................ 432
CAD .......................................................................101 Connect probe points .......................................... 437
import ........................................................... 37, 101 Delete recorded motion paths.............................. 443
save ............................................................. 33, 103 Display color spectrum ........................................ 441
Display coordinate axes ...................................... 441
CAD Model .............................................................100 Display deviation of probe points (residues) ......... 438
ACIS Converter ..................................................109 Display element graphics .................................... 427
CATIA V4 Converter ...........................................109 Display element label .......................................... 431
CATIA V5 Converter ...........................................110 Display feature label ........................................... 431
change ...............................................................104 Display machine components.............................. 432
Converter ...........................................................109 Display network grid............................................ 430
Converter options for CAD files ..................... 39, 106 Display position deviations of elements................ 438
delete .................................................................105 Display probe point numbers ............................... 430
DXF Converter....................................................111 Display probe points ........................................... 429
IGES Converter ..................................................112 Display probe swivel range.................................. 437
import ........................................................... 37, 101 Display recorded motion paths ............................ 442
Information .........................................................100 Manage CAD model layer ................................... 436
INS Converter .....................................................113 Position work piece ............................................. 434
Parasolid Converter ............................................114 Record motion paths ........................................... 442
ProEngineer Converter........................................115 Show display options .......................................... 433
save ............................................................. 33, 103 Show mouse pointer coordinates......................... 440
Siemens NX Converter........................................116 Change graphics view ............................................ 443
Solid Edge Converter ..........................................117
SolidWorks Converter .........................................118 Back to the last view ........................................... 447
Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Index 515

Index
Continue to next view ..........................................448 Contextual Tab Distribution

Create user view .................................................453
Define rotation angle ...........................................450 Define limitation .................................................. 247
Delete user view .................................................453 Thin out points .................................................... 248
Display CAD model and elements .......................446 Contextual Tab Head orientation
Display view perpendicular to element .................448
Enlarge window area...........................................444 Critical angles ..................................................... 256
Load standard views ...........................................452 Fixed angles ....................................................... 257
Load user view ...................................................454 Focal point.......................................................... 257
Move view ..........................................................447 Contextual tabs ........................................................76
Rename user view ..............................................453
Rotate view around horizontal screen axis ...........450 Converter ............................................................... 109
Rotate view around screen normal ......................451
ACIS Converter .................................................. 109
Rotate view around vertical screen axis ...............451
CATIA V4 ........................................................... 109
Rotate, move and zoom view ..............................446
CATIA V5 ........................................................... 110
Save user view ...................................................454
DXF ................................................................... 111
Split graphics view ..............................................449
IGES .................................................................. 112
Zoom all .............................................................443
INS..................................................................... 113
Zoom in ..............................................................445
Parasolid ............................................................ 114
Zoom out ............................................................445
ProEngineer ....................................................... 115
Zoom Window.....................................................444
SolidEdge........................................................... 117
Change personal settings ........................................ 60 SolidWorks ......................................................... 118
STEP ................................................................. 119
Click probe point on CAD model........................ 86, 506 Unigraphics ........................................................ 116
Close User format ........................................................ 121
VDA-FS .............................................................. 120
Database............................................................. 98
Feature Data ......................................................504 Converter options for CAD files ......................... 39, 106
Report ................................................................392 Coordinate system.................................................. 291
Statistics.............................................................500
Bestfit ................................................................. 299
Collision .................................................................. 63 create ................................................................. 295
Collision detection ................................................... 63 create using Bestfit ............................................. 299
create using RPS................................................ 298
Configure external programs .................................... 58 delete ................................................................. 294
Construct................................................................258 export ........................................................... 46, 303
Export .......................................................... 46, 303
Connection .........................................................261 Information ......................................................... 291
Construction Tables ............................................280 load .................................................................... 292
Create element out of existing elements ..............259 move .................................................................. 301
Create element with input ....................................258 Origin ................................................................. 297
Create intersection element out of two elements ..259 Pallet coordinate system ..................................... 291
Extract ................................................................265 PCS ................................................................... 291
Information .........................................................258 Primary direction................................................. 295
Intersection.........................................................259 rotate.................................................................. 302
Linkage ..............................................................262 save ................................................................... 293
Min/Max Element ................................................267 Secondary direction ............................................ 296
Offset Line ..........................................................270 Transform coordinate system into CAD model
Offset Plane........................................................272 coordinate system ........................................... 303
Offset Point.........................................................269 using several points ............................................ 298
Parallel ...............................................................274 WCS .................................................................. 291
Perpendicular .....................................................276 Work piece coordinate system ............................. 291
Projection ...........................................................276
Symmetry ...........................................................260 Copy
Tangent ..............................................................277 Diagrams............................................................ 498
Top of cone ........................................................265 Statistics............................................................. 498
Construction Tables ................................................280 Create and manage intersections ............................ 455
Connection .........................................................284 Create element out of existing elements .................. 259
Intersection.........................................................280
Min/Max Element ................................................285 Connection ......................................................... 261
Offset Line ..........................................................287 Extract................................................................ 265
Parallel ...............................................................288 Intersection......................................................... 259
Perpendicular .....................................................289 Linkage .............................................................. 262
Projection ...........................................................290 Min/Max Element ................................................ 267
Symmetry ...........................................................282 Offset Line .......................................................... 270

Index
Offset Plane........................................................272 Coordinate system .............................................. 294

Offset Point.........................................................269 Feature Data ...................................................... 504
Parallel ...............................................................274
Perpendicular .....................................................276 Diagrams ............................................................... 489
Projection ...........................................................276 Change diagram limits ........................................ 491
Symmetry ...........................................................260 Change limits...................................................... 490
Tangent ..............................................................277 copy ................................................................... 498
Top of cone ........................................................265 Data page........................................................... 492
Create element with input .......................................258 export ................................................................. 497
Histogram ........................................................... 494
Critical angles.........................................................256 Overview ............................................................ 492
print.................................................................... 499
Customize workspace.............................................. 81 R card ................................................................ 495
s card ................................................................. 496
Settings .............................................................. 489
D Trend diagram .................................................... 493
X bar chart.......................................................... 495
Database ................................................................ 89 DIN 1688................................................................ 335
close ................................................................... 98
DIN 16901.............................................................. 334
Close database window ....................................... 98
copy .................................................................... 94 Direction dialog....................................................... 511
Copy data ............................................................ 94
create ............................................................. 20, 89 Display
Customize View ................................................... 97 Database........................................................ 54, 90
delete .................................................................. 96 Feature Data ................................................ 57, 503
Delete data .......................................................... 96 Polygon ...................................................... 428, 429
display............................................................ 54, 90 Program ....................................................... 55, 133
Display data details .............................................. 99 Quick Selection Table ................................... 56, 468
edit ................................................................. 90, 96 Report .......................................................... 55, 391
Edit data .............................................................. 96 Solid........................................................... 428, 429
Edit database....................................................... 94 Statistics....................................................... 57, 485
Information .......................................................... 89 Transparent ........................................................ 428
insert ................................................................... 94 Wire frame.................................................. 428, 429
new ................................................................ 20, 89
open ............................................................... 28, 90 Display element graphics ........................................ 427
Paste................................................................... 94 Display general information about Metrosoft QUARTIS
Paste data ........................................................... 94 ............................................................................72
print ..................................................................... 97
Print data ............................................................. 97 Display tolerance zone............................................ 439
Settings .......................................................... 91, 92
Split database view .............................................. 98
Default tolerances...................................................335 E
Company specific tolerances ...............................336 Edit default fix tolerances ........................................ 327
DIN ....................................................................329
DIN 1688 ............................................................335 Edit general ISO and DIN tolerances ....................... 329
DIN 16901 ..........................................................334
Edit graphics .......................................................... 462
Fixed tolerance defaults ......................................327
ISO ....................................................................329 Cancel selection ......................................... 457, 463
ISO 2768 ............................................................329 Delete selected elements .................................... 464
Fade selected elements out ................................ 458
Define a probe system component (slot content)......208
Invert selection ........................................... 459, 463
Define stylus form ...................................................192 Select elements .......................................... 457, 462
Show all elements............................................... 459
Define/edit distribution method and parameter
Element
Centering probe mode ........................................246
Pecking probe mode ...........................................245 Connection ......................................................... 261
Scanning probe mode .........................................242 construct ............................................................ 259
Triggered probe mode.........................................238 export ...................................................................50
Extract................................................................ 265
Define/edit nominal values Intersection......................................................... 259
Element description ............................................222 Linkage .............................................................. 262
measure ............................................................. 217
Delete Min/Max Element ................................................ 267
Offset Line .......................................................... 270

Index
Offset Plane........................................................272 Turning Point ...................................................... 351

Offset Point.........................................................269 Using functions ................................................... 355
Parallel ...............................................................274
Perpendicular .....................................................276 Export ......................................................................44
Projection ...........................................................276 ACIS ....................................................................50
Symmetry ...........................................................260 Coordinate system ........................................ 46, 303
Tangent ..............................................................277 Diagrams............................................................ 497
Top of cone ........................................................265 Export difference of coordinate systems ........ 46, 303
Element window ...................................................... 77 IGES ....................................................................50
Program ....................................................... 44, 132
Display next element ............................................ 78 Q-DAS ......................................................... 47, 501
Display previous element ..................................... 78 Statistics............................................................. 497
Edit element ................................................... 79, 80 VDA data..............................................................50
Exchange contents of element window ................. 79
Load element in element window (via list) ............. 78 Export difference of coordinate systems ............ 46, 303
Lock element in right element window................... 80 Export elements into CAD file ...................................50
Enter stylus offset ...................................................193 Expression Editor ........................................... 355, 508
Evaluate Offset element values against each other .... 355, 509
Output element values ................................ 355, 509
Reference system according to ASME .................308
Using functions ........................................... 355, 510
Evaluate angularity tolerance ..................................376
Extras ......................................................................58
Evaluate form features ............................................359
Configure external programs .................................58
Cylindricity ..........................................................362
Evaluate profile tolerance of any line ...................363
Evaluate profile tolerance of any surface..............365 F
Flatness .............................................................360
Roundness .........................................................361
Feature Data .......................................................... 503
Straightness .......................................................359
close .................................................................. 504
Evaluate parallelism tolerance.................................378
delete ................................................................. 504
Evaluate perpendicularity tolerance .........................380 display.......................................................... 57, 503
record................................................................. 503
Evaluate position features .......................................368
Features................................................................. 306
Angularity ...........................................................376
Coaxiality............................................................371 Angle.................................................................. 350
Concentricity.......................................................371 Angle 2D ............................................................ 349
Parallelism ..........................................................378 Angularity ........................................................... 376
Perpendicularity ..................................................380 Calculate user specific feature............................. 355
Position ..............................................................368 Coaxiality ........................................................... 371
Reference system according to ASME .................308 Concentricity....................................................... 371
Run-out ..............................................................383 Cylindricity .......................................................... 362
Symmetry ...........................................................375 Distance ............................................................. 346
Total run-out .......................................................384 Edit defaults........................................................ 327
Evaluate form features ........................................ 359
Evaluate profile tolerance of any line .......................366 Evaluate position features ................................... 368
Select tolerance zone..........................................366 Evaluate profile tolerance of any line ................... 363
Evaluate profile tolerance of any surface ............. 365
Evaluate standard features Evaluate standard features.................................. 342
Angle..................................................................350 Expression Editor................................................ 355
Angle 2D ............................................................349 Flatness ............................................................. 360
Calculate user specific feature.............................355 Form deviation.................................................... 342
Distance .............................................................346 Half Size............................................................. 344
Expression Editor................................................355 Information ......................................................... 306
Form deviation ....................................................342 Input ................................................................... 354
Half Size .............................................................344 Offset element values against each other ............ 355
Input ...................................................................354 Output element values ........................................ 355
Offset element values against each other ............355 Parallelism.......................................................... 378
Output element values ........................................355 Perpendicularity .................................................. 380
Position ..............................................................345 Position ...................................................... 345, 368
Position dAB .......................................................352 Position dAB....................................................... 352
Range ................................................................351 Range ................................................................ 351
Reduction for distance feature .............................347 Reduction for distance feature ............................. 347
Size ....................................................................343 Roundness ......................................................... 361

Index
Run-out ..............................................................383 Display probe points ........................................... 429

Size ....................................................................343 Display probe swivel range.................................. 437
Static and dynamic features ................................306 Display recorded motion paths ............................ 442
Straightness .......................................................359 Display view perpendicular to element ................. 448
Symmetry ...........................................................375 Edit graphics....................................................... 462
Total run-out .......................................................384 Enlarge window area .......................................... 444
Turning Point ......................................................351 Fade selected elements out ................................ 458
Using functions ...................................................355 Information ......................................................... 423
Insert auxiliary elements...................................... 460
Filter
Insert curve ........................................................ 460
Actual value filter ................................................486 Invert selection ........................................... 459, 463
Adjust the statistical evaluation............................486 Live preview .........................................................17
Feature filter .......................................................486 Load standard views ........................................... 452
Report ................................................................394 Load user view ................................................... 454
Manage CAD model layer ................................... 436
Fixed angles ...........................................................257 Manage intersections .......................................... 456
Fixed tolerance defaults ..........................................327 Mirror CAD model ............................................... 461
Move view .......................................................... 447
Fluent User Interface ............................................... 16 Polygon .............................................................. 429
Position work piece ............................................. 434
Focal point .............................................................257
Record motion paths ........................................... 442
Rename user view .............................................. 453
Rotate view around horizontal screen axis ........... 450
G Rotate view around screen normal ...................... 451
Rotate view around vertical screen axis ............... 451
General dialogs ......................................................508 Rotate, move and zoom view .............................. 446
Save user view ................................................... 454
Direction dialog ...................................................511 Select elements .......................................... 457, 462
Expression Editor................................ 508, 509, 510 Settings .............................................................. 423
Position dialog ....................................................512 Show all elements............................................... 459
General ISO or DIN tolerances Show display options .......................................... 433
Show mouse pointer coordinates......................... 440
ISO 2768 ............................................................329 Solid................................................................... 429
Graphics ................................................................423 Split graphics view .............................................. 449
Wire frame.......................................................... 429
Adjust element representation .............................429 Zoom all ............................................................. 443
Adjust model representation ................................428 Zoom CAD model and elements .......................... 446
Back to the last view ...........................................447 Zoom in .............................................................. 445
Cancel selection ......................................... 457, 463 Zoom out ............................................................ 445
Change graphics display .....................................423 Zoom Window .................................................... 444
Change graphics view .........................................443
Collision .............................................................423 Groups .....................................................................75
Collision detection...............................................423
Colorize element in left element window with color
spectrum.........................................................432 I
Connect probe points ..........................................437
Continue to next view ..........................................448 IGES
Create and load intersections ..............................455
Create and manage intersections ........................455 export ...................................................................50
Create user view .................................................453 Import ......................................................................37
Define rotation angle ...........................................450
Delete recorded motion paths..............................443 CAD Model ................................................... 37, 101
Delete selected elements ....................................464 Program ....................................................... 41, 130
Delete user view .................................................453 Surface data ................................................. 37, 101
Display ...............................................................423 VDA data..............................................................43
Display CAD model and elements .......................446
Information
Display color spectrum ........................................441
Display coordinate axes ......................................441 Align objects ....................................................... 291
Display deviation of probe points (residues) .........438 Articulating probing system ................................. 199
Display element graphics ....................................427 CAD Model ......................................................... 100
Display element label ..........................................431 Construct ............................................................ 258
Display feature label ...........................................431 Coordinate system .............................................. 291
Display machine components ..............................432 Database..............................................................89
Display network grid............................................430 Graphics............................................................. 423
Display position deviations of elements................438 Machine ............................................................. 159
Display probe point numbers ...............................430 Measure ............................................................. 214

Index
Probe system......................................................175
Program .............................................................124
M
Reference sphere ...............................................195
Report ................................................................385 Machine ................................................................. 159
Statistics.............................................................478 Activate/deactivate axis drives............................. 168
Stylus changing system.......................................207 Change articulating probing system settings ........ 163
Information about the quick selection table ..............465 Change joystick direction .................................... 166
Change measuring speed and acceleration ......... 162
Insert Change measuring-/search-/retraction distance ... 159
Graphics.............................................................403 Change positioning speed and acceleration ......... 161
Graphics view .....................................................403 Change scanning speed...................................... 165
Table ..................................................................405 Information ......................................................... 159
initialize .............................................................. 167
Insert curve ............................................................460 move to origin ..................................................... 167
position............................................................... 170
ISO-10360-4...........................................................191
Settings .............................................................. 159
ISO1101/ASME Y14.5 Temperature....................................................... 171
Temperature compensation................................. 171
Angularity ...........................................................376
Coaxiality............................................................371 Mathematical fundamentals of statistics................... 478
Concentricity.......................................................371
Capability indexes............................................... 479
Cylindricity ..........................................................362
Concept definitions ............................................. 478
Evaluate profile tolerance of any line ...................363
Sample size........................................................ 485
Evaluate profile tolerance of any surface..............365
Flatness .............................................................360 Measure ................................................................. 214
Parallelism ..........................................................378
Perpendicularity ..................................................380 abort................................................................... 219
Position ..............................................................368 Actions ............................................................... 219
Roundness .........................................................361 Contextual Tab Distribution ................................. 237
Run-out ..............................................................383 Contextual Tab Edit ............................................ 250
Straightness .......................................................359 Contextual Tab Features ..................................... 251
Symmetry ...........................................................375 Contextual Tab Geometry ................................... 220
Total run-out .......................................................384 Contextual Tab Head orientation ......................... 255
Contextual Tab Progress..................................... 254
Contextual Tab Repeat ....................................... 252
Define limitation .................................................. 247
K Define/edit nominal values .................................. 220
Define/edit safety plane............................... 237, 249
Keyboard shortcuts.................................................513 Edit measuring sequence .................................... 254
Eliminate outliers ................................................ 234
Filter elements .................................................... 235
L Increase/decrease number of points .................... 254
Information ......................................................... 214
repeat ................................................................. 219
Layouts
Safety plane ....................................................... 249
Element label ......................................................399 Select calculation method ................................... 225
Feature label ......................................................401 Select/edit reference ........................................... 224
Point label ..........................................................397 Settings .............................................................. 215
Table ..................................................................395 start.................................................................... 219
Thin out points .................................................... 248
Linkage View measurement progress ............................... 254
Program ....................................................... 41, 130 Measurement
Live preview ............................................................ 17 create ...................................................................22
Load new ......................................................................22
open .....................................................................30
Company specific tolerances ...............................336
Coordinate system ..............................................292 Measurement database
Probe system......................................................186 create ............................................................. 20, 89
Reference sphere ...............................................196 new ................................................................ 20, 89
Load company specific tolerances ...........................336 open ............................................................... 28, 90
Metrosoft button .......................................................18
Mirror CAD model ................................................... 461
Mirror program ....................................................... 126

Index
Model Adjust ................................................................. 188

Calibrate..................................................... 177, 180
Polygon ..............................................................428 Calibrate probe system automatically .................. 180
Solid ...................................................................428 Calibrate probe system for PHS1 ........................ 181
Transparent ........................................................428 Calibrate probe system manually or semi-
Wire frame..........................................................428 automatically................................................... 177
Define stylus form ............................................... 192
Determine volumetric probing deviation ............... 191
N Enter stylus offset ............................................... 193
Information ......................................................... 175
New ........................................................................ 20 Load................................................................... 186
Optimize ............................................................. 189
Database........................................................ 20, 89 Save................................................................... 187
Measurement....................................................... 22 Set up ................................................................ 182
Measurement database................................... 20, 89 set up graphically................................................ 182
Program ....................................................... 23, 124 Settings .............................................................. 175
Quick Selection Table ................................... 27, 465 Switch probing mode .......................................... 177
Report ................................................................. 25 Program ................................................................. 124
Report paper ......................................................388
Activate edit mode .............................................. 142
Report template ..................................................387 Activate/deactivate split program view ................. 155
Work piece .......................................................... 21 Call subprogram ................................................. 153
Change and print view ........................................ 155
Check program ................................................... 134
O Close program window........................................ 156
CNC mode on/off ................................................ 147
Offline ....................................................................506 create ........................................................... 23, 124
Deactivate/activate program sentences ............... 143
Click probe point on CAD model .................... 86, 506 Delete backwards ............................................... 139
Simulation of a program process .........................507 display.......................................................... 55, 133
Simulation speed .......................................... 86, 506 Display program sentence details ........................ 157
Virtual joystick............................................... 86, 506 edit ..................................................................... 133
Offset element values against each other ........ 355, 509 Edit .................................................................... 142
Edit program ....................................................... 141
Open ....................................................................... 28 execute .............................................................. 133
Execute ...................................................... 134, 135
Database........................................................ 28, 90
Execute from cursor ............................................ 145
Measurement....................................................... 30
Execute program ................................................ 134
Measurement database................................... 28, 90
Execute program in current measurement ........... 136
Program ....................................................... 31, 128
Execute program in new measurement ................ 135
Quick Selection Table ................................... 32, 467
Execute program in single step mode .................. 137
Report .......................................................... 32, 389
Execute program with parameter modification...... 135
Report paper ................................................ 32, 389
Execute selection................................................ 144
Report template ............................................ 32, 389
Execute to cursor ................................................ 146
Work piece .......................................................... 29
export ........................................................... 44, 132
Output element values .................................... 355, 509 Export .......................................................... 44, 132
import ........................................................... 41, 130
Increase current measurement number by one .... 155
P Information ......................................................... 124
Insert comment ................................................... 151
Insert dialog........................................................ 149
PCS .......................................................................291 Insert image, sound or video ............................... 150
Personalize ............................................................. 60 Insert intermediate point ...................................... 148
Insert marker ...................................................... 152
Position dialog ........................................................512 Insert program loop............................................. 154
Print ........................................................................ 36 link ............................................................... 41, 130
mirror ................................................................. 126
Diagrams ............................................................499 new .............................................................. 23, 124
Program .............................................................156 open ............................................................. 31, 128
Report .......................................................... 36, 391 Pause................................................................. 137
Report paper ................................................ 36, 391 Pause program ................................................... 137
Report template ............................................ 36, 391 Print ................................................................... 156
Statistics.............................................................499 Record ............................................................... 138
Template ...................................................... 36, 391 save ............................................................. 34, 129
Set execution position ......................................... 147
Probe system .........................................................175
Set insertion point ............................................... 140

Index
Set/delete breakpoint ..........................................157

Single step .........................................................137
R
Stop ...................................................................138
Stop program ......................................................138 Record
Use program functions ........................................147 Feature Data ...................................................... 503
Program information ................................................ 84 Reference sphere ................................................... 195
Calibrate............................................................. 197
Q Information ......................................................... 195
Load................................................................... 196
New ................................................................... 197
Q-DAS Save................................................................... 197
export .................................................................501 Settings .............................................................. 195
Export........................................................... 47, 501 Reference system according to ASME .................... 308
Field configuration................................................ 49
Report .................................................................... 385
Q-DAS field configuration......................................... 49
Adjust arrows...................................................... 420
QUARTIS Options ................................................... 60 Adjust color and line settings ............................... 419
Adjust machine settings ....................................... 63 Adjust corners .................................................... 420
Adjust the quick access toolbar ............................ 61 Adjust format ...................................................... 415
Collision .............................................................. 63 Adjust frame ....................................................... 421
Collision detection................................................ 63 Adjust image....................................................... 421
Database............................................................. 67 Adjust margins.................................................... 415
Features .............................................................. 65 Adjust paper ....................................................... 416
Graphical User Interface ...................................... 60 Adjust paper format............................................. 416
Graphics.............................................................. 66 Adjust shadow .................................................... 422
Information .......................................................... 72 Adjust table contents, graphics contents, table and
Machine .............................................................. 63 data label layout.............................................. 417
Measure .............................................................. 64 Align data labels ................................................. 418
Personalize.......................................................... 60 Align objects ....................................................... 414
Quick access ....................................................... 61 Change default settings ...................................... 392
Quick Access Toolbar .......................................... 61 Close report work window ................................... 392
Report ................................................................. 69 Create layout for element label ............................ 399
Simulation ........................................................... 63 Create layout for feature label ............................. 401
Statistics.............................................................. 68 Create layout for point label................................. 397
System ................................................................ 71 Create table and data label layout ....................... 395
User .................................................................... 60 Create table layout.............................................. 395
create template............................................. 25, 387
Quick Access Toolbar .............................................. 74 Customize effects ............................................... 421
Quick Selection Table .............................................465 Customize objects .............................................. 414
Customize report view in work window ................ 413
Activate/deactivate batch mode recording ............473 Delete selected pages......................................... 408
Activate/deactivate text display............................476 display.......................................................... 55, 391
Back ...................................................................476 edit ..................................................................... 391
Batch..................................................................473 Edit .................................................................... 414
Call homepage ...................................................475 Edit text field....................................................... 418
Change view.......................................................475 Element label...................................................... 399
close ..................................................................477 Feature filter ....................................................... 394
Configure button .................................................468 Feature label ...................................................... 401
create ........................................................... 27, 465 Filter ................................................................... 394
Delete batch mode..............................................475 Information ......................................................... 385
Delete button ......................................................472 Insert drawing objects ......................................... 408
display.......................................................... 56, 468 Insert ellipse/circle .............................................. 412
Edit buttons ........................................................468 Insert graphics view ............................................ 403
Execute batch mode ...........................................473 Insert image........................................................ 412
Homepage..........................................................475 Insert line/arrow .................................................. 410
Information .........................................................465 Insert new page .................................................. 408
Jump to previous page ........................................476 Insert rectangle................................................... 411
new .............................................................. 27, 465 Insert report objects ............................................ 403
open ............................................................. 32, 467 Insert table ......................................................... 405
Text display ........................................................476 Insert text field .................................................... 409
Use the batch mode ............................................473 Layouts .............................................................. 395
new .............................................................. 25, 387
open ............................................................. 32, 389
Point label .......................................................... 397

Index
print .............................................................. 36, 391 Change view....................................................... 500

Report paper ......................................................388 close .................................................................. 500
Report template ..................................................387 Concept definitions ............................................. 478
save ............................................................. 35, 389 copy ................................................................... 498
Set anchor ..........................................................416 Data page........................................................... 492
Settings ..............................................................392 display..................................................................57
Display diagrams ................................................ 489
Ribbon .................................................................... 75 Evaluation method .............................................. 488
Contextual tabs.................................................... 76 export ................................................................. 497
Groups ................................................................ 75 Feature filter ....................................................... 486
Filter ................................................................... 486
Histogram ........................................................... 494
S Information ......................................................... 478
Mathematical fundamentals of statistics ............... 478
Overview ............................................................ 492
Sample size............................................................485 print.................................................................... 499
Save ....................................................................... 33 R card ................................................................ 495
refresh................................................................ 500
CAD ............................................................. 33, 103 s card ................................................................. 496
CAD Model ................................................... 33, 103 Sample size........................................................ 485
Coordinate system ..............................................293 Settings .............................................................. 489
Probe system......................................................187 Trend diagram .................................................... 493
Program ....................................................... 34, 129 X bar chart.......................................................... 495
Report .......................................................... 35, 389 Status window
Report paper ................................................ 35, 389 Average machine/work piece temperature display..86
Report template ............................................ 35, 389 Current coordinates display ...................................87
Template ...................................................... 35, 389 Display of current coordinate system .....................85
Select calculation method Display of current probe head position ...................85
Display of currently loaded measurement ..............83
Calculation methods ...........................................226 Display of currently loaded probe system ...............85
Display of currently loaded reference sphere .........84
Select Cartesian/polar output for evaluation.............341
Display of currently loaded stylus and probe mode.85
Select default tolerances .........................................341 Display of currently loaded work piece ...................83
Machine mode display ..........................................83
Settings ...................................................... 63, 92, 195 Virtual joystick ......................................................86
Database........................................................ 67, 91 Status window ..........................................................83
Diagrams ............................................................489
Features .............................................................. 65 Status window
Filter ...................................................................486
Display of active measurement units......................88
Graphics....................................................... 66, 423
Machine .............................................................. 63 Stylus changing system .......................................... 207
Measure ....................................................... 64, 215
Probe system......................................................175 calibrate ............................................................. 210
Report .......................................................... 69, 392 Define a probe system component (slot content) .. 208
Statistics....................................................... 68, 489 Deposit probe and retrieve from a slot ................. 207
System ................................................................ 71 Information ......................................................... 207
Temperature compensation.................................171 Surface data
Shortcut .................................................................513 import ........................................................... 37, 101
Show quick access for program start ................. 56, 468
Simulation of a program process .............................507 T
Simulation speed .............................................. 86, 506
Temperature compensation
Static and dynamic features ....................................306
adjust ................................................................. 171
Statistical evaluation of features ........................ 57, 485
Settings .............................................................. 171
Statistics ................................................................478
Template
Actual value filter ................................................486
print.............................................................. 36, 391
Adjust the statistical evaluation............................486
save ............................................................. 35, 389
Capability indexes ...............................................479
Change diagram limits ........................................491 Tolerance groups ................................................... 334
Change limits......................................................490
Change random sample scope ............................488 110..................................................................... 334

Index
120.....................................................................334 export ...................................................................50

130.....................................................................334 import ...................................................................43
140.....................................................................334
150.....................................................................334
160.....................................................................334 W
FWT ...................................................................334
Tolerances WCS ...................................................................... 291
Company specific tolerances ...............................336 Wire frame ............................................................. 429
DIN ....................................................................329
Work piece
DIN 1688 ............................................................335
DIN 16901 ..........................................................334 create ...................................................................21
Fixed tolerance defaults ......................................327 new ......................................................................21
ISO ....................................................................329 open .....................................................................29
ISO 2768 ............................................................329
Select default tolerances .....................................341 Work piece coordinate system ................................ 291
Transform coordinate system into CAD model Work window............................................................54

coordinate system ...............................................303 Database........................................................ 54, 90
Feature Data ................................................ 57, 503
Program ....................................................... 55, 133
U Quick Selection Table ................................... 56, 468
Report .......................................................... 55, 391
Using functions ............................................... 355, 510 Statistics....................................................... 57, 485
Workspace ...............................................................81
V Customize workspace ...........................................81
VDA data

Metrosoft QUARTIS User Manual PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Metrosoft QUARTIS User Manual PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7

Tel. +41 81 257 07 00

Table of Contents ............................................................................................3

1 Fluent User Interface ...........................................................................15

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Table of Contents 3

2.9.2 Adjust the quick access toolbar .............................................................. 60

3 Quick Access Toolbar .........................................................................73

5 Element window ...................................................................................76

7 Status window ......................................................................................82

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Table of Contents 4

8.4 Display and edit database............................................................................. 89

9 CAD Model ............................................................................................99

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Table of Contents 5

10.9.4 Execute program in current measurement............................................ 135

12 Probe system ......................................................................................174

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Table of Contents 6

12.4.1 Calibrate probe system manually or semi-automatically ....................... 176

13 Reference sphere ...............................................................................194

14 Articulating probing system .............................................................198

15 Stylus changing system ....................................................................206

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Table of Contents 7

Tangential inside ...................................................................................232

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Table of Contents 8

18 Align/Coordinate system ...................................................................290

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Table of Contents 9

19.6.4 Evaluate cylindricity tolerance .............................................................. 361

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Table of Contents 10

20.14.6 Adjust paper ......................................................................................... 415

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Table of Contents 11

21.3.12 Define rotation angle ............................................................................ 449

22 Quick Selection Table ........................................................................464

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Table of Contents 12

24 Feature Data .......................................................................................502

26 General dialogs ..................................................................................507

27 Keyboard shortcuts ...........................................................................512

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Table of Contents 13

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Table of Contents 14

1 Fluent User Interface

Metrosoft button Element window

Quick access toolbar Workspace

Ribbon Status Window

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Fluent User Interface 15

1.1 Live preview

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Fluent User Interface 16

Overview Metrosoft Button

New Measurement database

Open Measurement database

Save CAD Model

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Metrosoft button 17

Import CAD Model

Work window Database

Extras External Programs

QUARTIS Options Personalize

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Metrosoft button 18

1. Click on the Metrosoft button.

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Metrosoft button 19

2.1.2 Create new work piece

1. Click on the Metrosoft button.

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Metrosoft button 20

2.1.3 Create new measurement

1. Click on the Metrosoft button.

Metrosoft QUARTIS R7 Metrosoft button 21

2.1.4 Create new program